summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/scrkernel-sections.dtx
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorNorbert Preining <norbert@preining.info>2022-07-05 03:01:03 +0000
committerNorbert Preining <norbert@preining.info>2022-07-05 03:01:03 +0000
commitf1e3d1ca3738aac0ba720e4c1d87795d5d0cdcd9 (patch)
treee8caf076081509f7dd667c7c608bbf660b35baac /macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/scrkernel-sections.dtx
parent1c10375ec46d7d83b2f1efc2a71b7ea114c889f0 (diff)
CTAN sync 202207050301
Diffstat (limited to 'macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/scrkernel-sections.dtx')
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/scrkernel-sections.dtx6754
1 files changed, 6754 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/scrkernel-sections.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/scrkernel-sections.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5ed80eebaa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/scrkernel-sections.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,6754 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+% ======================================================================
+% scrkernel-sections.dtx
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2022
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained".
+%
+% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm.
+%
+% This work consists of all files listed in MANIFEST.md.
+% ======================================================================
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-sections.dtx 3874 2022-06-05 10:38:02Z kohm $
+% The runs of run-time file generation:
+%<preidentify>%%% (run: preidentify)
+% - everything that is needed before selfidentification of resulting files
+% (unused)
+%<identify>%%% (run: identify)
+% - everything that is needed for selfidentification of resulting files
+% (unused)
+%<prepare>%%% (run: prepare)
+% - everything that is needed to define options
+%<option>%%% (run: option)
+% - definition of options
+%<execoption>%%% (run: execoption)
+% - initial option executions up to \KOMAProcessOptions
+%<body>%%% (run: body)
+% - everything, that should be done after \KOMAProcessOptions
+%<exit>%%% (run: exit)
+% - everything, that should be done immediately before leaving the file
+%<*dtx>
+\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
+\begingroup
+ \def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
+ \filedate$Date: 2022-06-05 12:38:02 +0200 (So, 05. Jun 2022) $
+ \def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
+ \filerevision$Revision: 3874 $
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\endgroup
+ \noexpand\ProvidesFile{scrkernel-sections.dtx}%
+ [\filedate\space\filerevision\space
+ KOMA-Script source (disposition)]
+ }%
+\reserved@a
+\documentclass[USenglish]{koma-script-source-doc}
+\usepackage{babel}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{3}
+\begin{document}
+\DocInput{scrkernel-sections.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</dtx>
+% \fi
+%
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1996/01/20}{configurable font sized for headings}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/06/26}{first version after splitting \file{scrclass.dtx}}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{reordered code in \file{scrkernel-sections.dtx}}
+% \changes{v3.36}{2022/03/08}{switch over from \cls*{scrdoc} to
+% \cls*{koma-script-source-doc}}
+% \changes{v3.36}{2022/03/21}{the whole implementation documentation in English}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{scrkernel-sections.dtx}
+% \title{The Code for Parts, Chapters, Sections etc.\@ of
+% \href{https://komascript.de}{\KOMAScript} Classes}
+% \author{\href{mailto:komascript@gmx.info}{Markus Kohm}}
+% \date{Revision \fileversion{} of \filedate}
+% \maketitle
+% \begin{abstract}
+% \file{scrkernel-sections.dtx} implements all the options, macros and user
+% commands used for the sectioning of documents.
+% \end{abstract}
+% \tableofcontents
+%
+% \section{User Manual}
+%
+% You can find the user documentation the commands implemented here in the
+% \KOMAScript{} manual, either the German \file{scrguide} or the English
+% \file{scrguien}.
+%
+% \MaybeStop{\PrintIndex}
+%
+% \section{Implementation of Parts, Chapters, Section etc.}
+%
+% The letter class does not provide sectioning.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class&!letter>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{@maybeasf}
+% \changes{v2.8e}{2001/07/10}{removed}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Interleaf pages}
+%
+% With \cls*{scrbook} and \cls*{scrreprt} chapters can optionally (or by
+% default) start automatically on a odd page. So if the last page before
+% already was an odd page, we have to insert a so called interleaf page. The
+% main handling of interleaf pages is already defined in
+% \file{scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx} (but there is a ToDo note to move is to a
+% new file). Here we only support the optional selection of the start page of
+% a chapter.
+%
+% \begin{option}{open}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/06}{added}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{using \cs{FamilyKeyState}}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{using internal value storage}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{initialization using \opt{headings}}
+% \begin{macro}{\@openrighttrue,\@openrightfalse,\if@openright}
+% The option supports three values:
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{llll}
+% \opt{open} & \cs{if@openright} & \cs{cleardoublestandardpage} &
+% meaning\\\hline
+% \opt{=any} & \cs{iffalse} & \cs{cleardoubleoddstandardpage} &
+% chapters on any page\\
+% \opt{=right} & \cs{iftrue} & \cs{cleardoubleoddstandardpage} &
+% chapters on odd pages\\
+% \opt{=left} & \cs{iftrue} & \cs{cleardoubleevenstandardpage} &
+% chapters on even pages\\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*book|report>
+%<*prepare>
+\newif\if@openright
+%<report>\@openrightfalse
+%<book>\@openrighttrue
+%</prepare>
+%<*option>
+\KOMA@key{open}{%
+ \KOMA@set@ncmdkey{open}{@tempa}{%
+ {any}{0},%
+ {right}{1},%
+ {left}{2}%
+ }{#1}%
+ \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ \KOMA@kav@xreplacevalue{.\KOMAClassFileName}{open}{#1}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{openany}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{openright}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{openleft}%
+ \ifcase \@tempa\relax
+ \KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{openany}%
+ \@openrightfalse
+ \renewcommand*{\cleardoublestandardpage}{\cleardoubleoddstandardpage}%
+ \or
+ \KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{openright}%
+ \@openrighttrue
+ \renewcommand*{\cleardoublestandardpage}{\cleardoubleoddstandardpage}%
+ \or
+ \KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{openleft}%
+ \@openrighttrue
+ \renewcommand*{\cleardoublestandardpage}{\cleardoubleevenstandardpage}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+%</option>
+%<*execoption>
+%<book>\KOMAExecuteOptions{headings=openright}
+%<report>\KOMAExecuteOptions{headings=openany}
+%</execoption>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \if@openright
+% \end{option}^^A open
+%
+% \begin{option}{openright,openany}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{obsolete}
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{standard instead of obsolete}
+% Two deprecated options of \KOMAScript{} 2.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*option>
+\KOMA@DeclareStandardOption{openright}{open=right}
+\KOMA@DeclareStandardOption{openany}{open=any}
+%</option>
+%</book|report>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{option}^^A openright,openany
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Numbers and the auto dot feature}
+%
+% Not only parts, chapter, section etc.\@ are numbered. But several other
+% numbers are related to these numbers. The feature we define here is also
+% known as the auto dot feature.
+%
+% \begin{option}{numbers}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/07}{added}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{using \cs{FamilyKeyState}}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{using internal value storage}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@dotchangeatdocument}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/07}{added}
+% The \opt{numbers} option provides several settings for the dot at the end of
+% such numbers. But because the setting is always document global, this option
+% cannot be changed inside the document, but in the document preamble only. If
+% you try to change it inside the document, the error of
+% \cs{scr@dotchangedatdocument} will be raised. Currently following values to
+% the option are supported:
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% \opt{numbers} & meaning\\\hline
+% \opt{=auto} & automatically detect, if the dot has to be added\\
+% \opt{=enddot} & always use a dot at the end\\
+% \opt{=noenddot}& don't use a dot at the end\\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% The criterion for automatically adding a dot is: Does any sectioning number
+% contain something else but an Arabic number for a number portion?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*prepare>
+\newcommand*{\scr@dotchangeatdocument}[1]{%
+ \ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ change of end dot feature after \string\begin{document}%
+ }{%
+ You've tried to set `numbers=#1' after \string\begin{document},\MessageBreak
+ but this option is only allowed at the document preamble.\MessageBreak
+ See KOMA-Script manual for more information about.%
+ }%
+}
+%</prepare>
+%<*option>
+\KOMA@key{numbers}{%
+ \KOMA@set@ncmdkey{numbers}{@tempa}{%
+ {autoendperiod}{0},{autoenddot}{0},{auto}{0},%
+ {endperiod}{1},{withendperiod}{1},{periodatend}{1},%
+ {enddot}{1},{withenddot}{1},{dotatend}{1},%
+ {noendperiod}{2},{noperiodatend}{2},%
+ {noenddot}{2},{nodotatend}{2}%
+ }{#1}%
+ \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ \KOMA@kav@xreplacevalue{.\KOMAClassFileName}{numbers}{#1}%
+ \ifcase \@tempa\relax
+ \if@atdocument\scr@dotchangeatdocument{#1}\else
+ \let\scr@altsecnumhook\@empty
+ \fi
+ \or
+ \if@atdocument\scr@dotchangeatdocument{#1}\else
+ \let\scr@altsecnumhook\scr@altsecnumhooktrue
+ \fi
+ \or
+ \if@atdocument\scr@dotchangeatdocument{#1}\else
+ \let\scr@altsecnumhook\scr@altsecnumhookfalse
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+%</option>
+%<execoption>\KOMAExecuteOptions{numbers=autoendperiod}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dotchangeatdocument
+% \end{option}^^A numbers
+%
+% \begin{option}{pointednumbers,pointlessnumbers}
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/19}{added}
+% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{option name fixed}
+% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{immediate setting \cs{@altsecnumformatfalse}
+% to \cs{@altsecnumformattrue}}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/07}{obsolete}
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}
+% Two deprecated options.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*option>
+\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{pointednumbers}{numbers=enddot}
+\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{pointlessnumbers}{numbers=noenddot}
+%</option>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{option}^^A pointednumbers,pointlessnumbers
+%
+% \begin{command}{\autodot}
+% \changes{v2.7}{2001/01/03}{added}
+% \begin{macro}{\@altsecnumformattrue,\@altsecnumformatfalse,\if@altsecnumformat}
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{added}
+% \begin{macro}{\@autodottrue,\@autodotfalse,\if@autodot}
+% \changes{v2.8e}{2001/07/10}{added}
+% \changes{v2.9k}{2003/01/12}{write to \cs{@mainaux}}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/01/15}{write to \cs{@mainaux} just before closing the
+% file}
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/07}{using \cs{immediate}}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/10/07}{global}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/25}{using \cs{csname}\dots\cs{endcsname}}
+% Depending on \cs{if@altsecnumformat} \cs{autodot} shows a dot or nothing.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Add an optional look forward feature to also not add a dot, if
+% the next character is a punctuation character, e.g. a dot, semicolon,
+% comma etc.
+% \end{description}
+% \cs{if@autodot} is the current result of the inspection of all sectioning
+% numbers. If it is \cs{iftrue}, switching on the dot will be written to the
+% main \file{aux}-file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*prepare>
+\newif\if@altsecnumformat\@altsecnumformatfalse
+\newif\if@autodot
+\renewcommand*{\@autodottrue}{\global\let\if@autodot\iftrue}
+\renewcommand*{\@autodotfalse}{\global\let\if@autodot\iffalse}
+\@autodotfalse
+%</prepare>
+%<*body>
+\BeforeClosingMainAux{%
+ \if@autodot\if@filesw\immediate\write\@mainaux{%
+ \string\global\string\csname\space @altsecnumformattrue\string\endcsname}%
+ \fi\fi}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \if@autodot
+% \end{macro}^^A \if@altsecnumformat
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@altsecnumhook,\scr@altsecnumhooktrue,\scr@altsecnumhookfalse}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/07}{added}
+% Used by option \opt{numbers} for (de-)activation of the dot in the document
+% preamble and to overwrite the setting found in the \file{aux}-file.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] The hook is executed after reading the main \file{aux}-file. So
+% the overwriting of the setting does work. It is needed as long a boolean
+% switch is used, because otherwise option \opt{numbers=auto} would not be
+% able to reset option \opt{numbers=enddot} ot \opt{numbers=noenddot}. With
+% this code we simply can use an empty \cs{scr@altsecnumhook} for
+% \opt{numbers=auto} and two compellent definitions for the other cases.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*prepare>
+\newcommand*{\scr@altsecnumhook}{}
+\AtBeginDocument{\scr@altsecnumhook}
+\newcommand*{\scr@altsecnumhooktrue}{%
+ \@altsecnumformattrue\global\let\@altsecnumformatfalse\@altsecnumformattrue
+}
+\newcommand*{\scr@altsecnumhookfalse}{%
+ \@altsecnumformatfalse\global\let\@altsecnumformattrue\@altsecnumformatfalse
+}
+%</prepare>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@altsecnumhook,\scr@altsecnumhooktrue,\scr@altsecnumhookfalse
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@maybeautodot,\@@maybeautodot}
+% \changes{v2.8e}{2001/07/10}{added}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/10/07}{not any longer needed \cs{aftergroup} removed}
+% We scan a \cs{the\meta{counter}} command to decide, if the automatic dot has
+% to be added (later). It sets \cs{@autodottrue}, if there is any kind of
+% alphabetic or Roman numbering command inside the one time expansion of the
+% \cs{the\meta{counter}} given as argument.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] This is a heuristic only. It would, e.g., fail, if you are
+% using another macro, that expands to the output of the counter, e.g.,
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \def\myalph{\alph}\def\thesection{\myalph{section}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% However, it seems that the heuristic is so good, that in more than twenty
+% years nobody has complained about.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand{\@maybeautodot}[1]{\if@autodot\else\begingroup%
+ \expandafter\@@maybeautodot #1\@stop\endgroup\fi
+}
+\newcommand*{\@@maybeautodot}[1]{%
+ \ifx #1\@stop\let\@@maybeautodot\relax
+ \else
+ \ifx #1\Alph \@autodottrue\fi
+ \ifx #1\alph \@autodottrue\fi
+ \ifx #1\Roman \@autodottrue\fi
+ \ifx #1\roman \@autodottrue\fi
+ \ifx #1\@Alph \@autodottrue\fi
+ \ifx #1\@alph \@autodottrue\fi
+ \ifx #1\@Roman \@autodottrue\fi
+ \ifx #1\@roman \@autodottrue\fi
+ \ifx #1\romannumeral \@autodottrue\fi
+ \fi
+ \@@maybeautodot
+}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \@maybeautodot,\@@maybeautodot
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*\autodot{\if@altsecnumformat.\fi}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \autodot
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Definition and handling of sectioning commands}
+%
+% Some of the \LaTeX{} kernel features are used here too. But almost none of
+% these features is enough to implement all the functionality of \KOMAScript{}
+% classes. So we redefine several of the \LaTeX{} kernel macros to extend them
+% and define several new features.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Don't redefine \LaTeX{} kernel macros, but define new macros
+% for the interface. Maybe this should also be swapped to a new package used
+% by the classes.
+% \end{description}
+%
+% \begin{counter}{secnumdepth}
+% The counter rules down to which section level the headings should be
+% numbered.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Move this behind the declaration of the section levels to be
+% able to use symbolic value \cs{subsectionnumdepth}. It is not related to
+% the auto dot feature.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+%<book|report>\setcounter{secnumdepth}{2}
+%<article>\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{counter}
+%
+%
+% \begin{command}{\ifnumbered,\Ifnumbered}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/16}{added}
+% \changes{v3.28}{2019/11/19}{\cs{ifnumbered} renamed to \cs{Ifnumbered}}
+% \begin{command}{\ifunnumbered,\Ifunnumbered}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/16}{added}
+% \changes{v3.28}{2019/11/19}{\cs{ifunnumbered} renamed to \cs{Ifunnumbered}}
+% Commands
+% \begin{quote}\raggedright
+% \cs{Ifnumbered}\marg{section level name}\marg{numbered}\marg{not numbered}\\
+% \cs{Ifunnumbered}\marg{section level name}\marg{not numbered}\marg{numbered}\\
+% \end{quote}
+% If \meta{section level name} has to be numbered, execute code \meta{numbered}
+% otherwise execute code \meta{not numbered}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\providecommand*{\ifnumbered}{%
+ \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{Usage of deprecated command
+ `\string\ifnumbered'.\MessageBreak
+ The command has been renamed because of a\MessageBreak
+ recommendation of The LaTeX Project Team.\MessageBreak
+ Please replace `\string\ifnumbered' by `\string\Ifnumbered'%
+ }%
+ \Ifnumbered
+}
+\newcommand*{\Ifnumbered}[1]{%
+ \if@currentusenumber
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{#1numdepth}{%
+ \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+ }{%
+ \expandafter\ifnum \@nameuse{#1numdepth}>\c@secnumdepth
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@secondoftwo
+ \else
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@firstoftwo
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+ \fi
+}
+\providecommand*{\ifunnumbered}{%
+ \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{Usage of deprecated command
+ `\string\ifunnumbered'.\MessageBreak
+ The command has been renamed because of a\MessageBreak
+ recommendation of The LaTeX Project Team.\MessageBreak
+ Please replace `\string\ifunnumbered' by `\string\Ifunnumbered'%
+ }%
+ \Ifunnumbered
+}
+\newcommand*{\Ifunnumbered}[1]{%
+ \Ifnumbered{#1}{\@secondoftwo}{\@firstoftwo}%
+}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \Ifunnumbered
+% \end{command}^^A \ifnumbered
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@activate@xsection,\scr@osectarg}
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{added}
+% Option \opt{headings=optiontotocandhead}, \opt{headings=optiontotoc} and
+% \opt{headings=optiontohead} used
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{scr@activate@xsection}\marg{value}
+% \end{quote}
+% with the values 3, 2 and 1 to activate the extended optional argument. This
+% sets \cs{scr@osectarg} to the corresponding value. The initial value 0
+% deactivates the extended optional argument.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Do we really need \cs{scr@activate@xsection}, that is used
+% inside option \opt{headings} only?
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*prepare>
+\newcommand*{\scr@osectarg}{0}
+\newcommand*{\scr@activate@xsection}[1]{%
+ \renewcommand*{\scr@osectarg}{#1}%
+}
+%</prepare>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@activate@xsection,\scr@osectarg
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@startsection}
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{re-definition for extended optional argument}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@startsection}
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{added}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{using \cs{numexpr} for argument 2}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{using \cs{glueexpr} for arguments 3--5}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} replaced by \cs{kernel@ifstar}}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{supporting \opt{afterindent}}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@saved@startsection}
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{added}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{supporting \pkg{amsgen}}
+% \begin{macro}{\startsection@sectionname,\startsection@secnumdepth,
+% \startsection@indent,\startsection@beforeskip,
+% \startsection@afterskip,\startsection@afterindent,
+% \@startsection@runintrue,\@startsection@runinfalse,
+% \if@startsection@runin}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/05/14}{added}
+% The \cs{@startsection} of the \LaTeX{} kernel does not provide all the
+% features we need for \KOMAScript. And the generic hooks of \LaTeX{} do not
+% allow to change it wide enough. So we either have to use \pkg{xparse} to
+% patch it very much or we have to define our own version. In this case
+% patching is too fragile, so we define \cs{scr@startsection} and store the
+% original definition in \cs{scr@saved@startsection}.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] Package \pkg{amsgen} redefines \cs{@ifstar}. The new version
+% does not ignore white spaces. So testing the original definition using
+% \cs{@ifstar} may fail. It is better to use \cs{kernel@ifstar}.
+% \item[ToDo:] All the testing here doesn't make much sense, because we are
+% inside a class and packages like \pkg{amsgen} should not yet have been
+% loaded. So the test only needs to test, if the \LaTeX{} kernel has been
+% changed.
+% \item[Note:] In our own \cs{scr@startsection} the macros
+% \cs{startsection@sectionname}, \cs{startsection@secnumdepth},
+% \cs{startsection@indent}, \cs{startsection@beforeskip},
+% \cs{startsection@afterskip}, \cs{if@afterindent},
+% \cs{if@startsection@runin}, and \cs{startsection@afterindent} are valid
+% from executing the do hook \dhook{heading/postinit}. So they can be used
+% inside all the hooks.
+% \item[Note:] \cs{startsection@indent}, \cs{startsection@beforeskip},
+% \cs{startsection@afterskip} and \cs{startsection@afterindent} are either
+% skips or \cs{glueexpr}, that can be used like skips.
+% \item[Note:] \cs{startsection@beforeskip} and \cs{startsection@afterskip}
+% are effective values already. Not special treatment for negative or
+% positive values must be done.
+% \item[Note:] \cs{if@startsection@runin}
+% are either \cs{iftrue} or \cs{iffalse}.
+% \item[Note:] \cs{if@startsection@indentafter} does not exist and is not
+% needed, because \cs{if@afterindent} is already valid and also either
+% \cs{iftrue} or \cs{iffalse}.
+% \item[Note:] Using one of the \cs{startsection@\dots}
+% resp. \cs{if@startsection@\dots} macros outside \cs{scr@startsection} is
+% not allowed and the result is unspecified. Inside \cs{scr@startsection}
+% they have to be interpreted as constants, so changing them is not allowed!
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\scr@saved@startsection}[6]{%
+ \if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi
+ \par
+ \@tempskipa #4\relax
+ \@afterindenttrue
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@
+ \@tempskipa -\@tempskipa \@afterindentfalse
+ \fi
+ \if@nobreak
+ \everypar{}%
+ \else
+ \addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace\@tempskipa
+ \fi
+ \kernel@ifstar
+ {\@ssect{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}%
+ {\@dblarg{\@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}%
+}
+\def\reserved@a#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+ \if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi
+ \par
+ \@tempskipa #4\relax
+ \@afterindenttrue
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@
+ \@tempskipa -\@tempskipa \@afterindentfalse
+ \fi
+ \if@nobreak
+ \everypar{}%
+ \else
+ \addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace\@tempskipa
+ \fi
+ \@ifstar
+ {\@ssect{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}%
+ {\@dblarg{\@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}%
+}
+\ifcase \ifx\@startsection\scr@saved@startsection 0
+ \else
+ \ifx\@startsection\reserved@a 0
+ \else 1
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \newcommand*{\scr@startsection}[6]{%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/preinit/#1}%
+ \if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi
+ \par
+ \@tempskipa \glueexpr #4\relax
+ \@ifundefined{scr@#1@afterindent}{%
+ \def\startsection@afterindent##1##2##3{##3}%
+ }{%
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\startsection@afterindent
+ \csname scr@#1@afterindent\endcsname
+ }%
+ \startsection@afterindent{\@afterindenttrue}{\@afterindentfalse}{%
+ \@afterindenttrue
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@
+ \@tempskipa -\@tempskipa \@afterindentfalse
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \def\startsection@sectionname{#1}%
+ \def\startsection@secnumdepth{\numexpr #2\relax}%
+ \def\startsection@indent{\glueexpr #3\relax}%
+ \let\startsection@beforeskip\@tempskipa
+ \@ifundefined{scr@#1@runin}{%
+ \def\scr@sect@runin##1##2##3{##3}%
+ }{%
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\scr@sect@runin
+ \csname scr@#1@runin\endcsname
+ }%
+ \scr@sect@runin{%
+ \def\startsection@afterskip{\glueexpr #3\relax}%
+ \expandafter\let\csname if@startsection@runin\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname iftrue\endcsname
+ }{%
+ \def\startsection@afterskip{\glueexpr #3\relax}%
+ \expandafter\let\csname if@startsection@runin\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname iffalse\endcsname
+ }{%
+ \ifdim \glueexpr #5\relax <\z@
+ \def\startsection@afterskip{\glueexpr (#3)*\m@ne\relax}%
+ \expandafter\let\csname if@startsection@runin\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname iftrue\endcsname
+ \else
+ \def\startsection@afterskip{\glueexpr #3\relax}%
+ \expandafter\let\csname if@startsection@runin\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname iffalse\endcsname
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/postinit/#1}%
+ \if@nobreak
+ \everypar{}%
+ \else
+ \addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace\@tempskipa
+ \fi
+ \kernel@ifstar {%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/branch/star/#1}%
+ \def\scr@s@ct@@nn@m@{#1}%
+ \@ssect{\glueexpr #3\relax}{\glueexpr #4\relax}{\glueexpr #5\relax}{#6}%
+ }{%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/branch/nostar/#1}%
+ \scr@section@dblarg{%
+ \@sect{#1}{\numexpr #2\relax}{\glueexpr #3\relax}{\glueexpr #4\relax}%
+ {\glueexpr #5\relax}{#6}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }
+\else
+ \ClassWarningNoLine{\KOMAClassName}{`\string\@startsection' has been
+ changed.\MessageBreak
+ \KOMAClassName\space needs it's own definition of
+ `\string\@startsection'\MessageBreak
+ to provide extended features for the optional argument\MessageBreak
+ of `\string\section' etc.\MessageBreak
+ Generally it defines `\string\@startsection' completely new\MessageBreak
+ to achieve this. Because of the unexpected definition\MessageBreak
+ an alternative approach will be used.\MessageBreak
+ If this fails and if there isn't a new release of\MessageBreak
+ KOMA-Script that fixes the problem, please\MessageBreak
+ send a report to the KOMA-Script author.\MessageBreak
+ Note, that this alternative approach does not\MessageBreak
+ execute the elements of do-hooks:\MessageBreak
+ \space\space- `heading/postinit',\MessageBreak
+ \space\space- `heading/branch/star',\MessageBreak
+ \space\space- `heading/branch/nostar',\MessageBreak
+ and does always use `runin=bysign' and\MessageBreak
+ `afterindent=bysign'%
+ }%
+ \let\scr@saved@startsection\@startsection
+ \newcommand*{\scr@startsection}[6]{%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/preinit/#1}%
+ \kernel@ifstar {%
+ \scr@saved@startsection{#1}{\numexpr #2\relax}{\glueexpr #3\relax}%
+ {\glueexpr #4\relax}{\glueexpr #5\relax}{#6}*%
+ }{%
+ \scr@section@dblarg{%
+ \scr@saved@startsection{#1}{\numexpr #2\relax}{\glueexpr #3\relax}%
+ {\glueexpr #4\relax}{\glueexpr #5\relax}{#6}}%
+ }%
+ }
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@sect@runin}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{added}
+% Depending on sectioning feature \opt{runin} the macro expands to the first
+% argument, if a in-text heading aka run-in heading has to used, the second
+% argument, if a free-standing heading has to be used, or the third argument,
+% of run-in or free-standing depends on the sign of \opt{afterskip}. The
+% initial definition is depending on the sign of \opt{afterskip}. This initial
+% definition is also done inside \cs{@xsect}. \cs{scr@startsection} also
+% redefines \cs{scr@sect@runin}. So it should always be the currently valid
+% definition, even if \cs{scr@startsection} is used with a section command,
+% that does not provide all the variable of \KOMAScript.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@sect@runin}[3]{#3}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@sect@runin
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@startsection@ulm@error}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/05/14}{added}
+% This is the initial error message for using one of the internal macros
+% before \cs{scr@startsection}. This should never happen.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@startsection@ulm@error}[1]{%
+ \ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ \string#1 undefined outside of \string\scr@startsection
+ }{%
+ A KOMA-Script macro for package authors have been used outside
+ the\MessageBreak
+ specified definition scope.\MessageBreak
+ See `scrkernel-sections.dtx' for more information.%
+ }%
+}
+\newcommand*\startsection@sectionname{%
+ \scr@startsection@ulm@error\startsection@sectionname}
+\newcommand*\startsection@secnumdepth{%
+ \scr@startsection@ulm@error\startsection@secnumdepth}
+\newcommand*\startsection@indent{%
+ \scr@startsection@ulm@error\startsection@indent}
+\newcommand*\startsection@beforeskip{%
+ \scr@startsection@ulm@error\startsection@beforeskip}
+\newcommand*\startsection@afterskip{%
+ \scr@startsection@ulm@error\startsection@afterskip}
+\newcommand*{\if@startsection@runin}{%
+ \scr@startsection@ulm@error\if@startsection@runin}
+\newif\if@startsection@runin
+\newcommand*\startsection@afterindent{%
+ \scr@startsection@ulm@error\startsection@afterindent}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@startsection@ulm@error
+% \end{macro}^^A \startsection@sectionname … \scr@startsection@runin
+% \begin{macro}{\At@startsection}
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/11}{added}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/04}{using \cs{AddtoDoHook}}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/04}{deprecated}
+% This is deprecated now. You should use the corresponding
+% \dhook{heading/postinit} do hook. However the do hooks are command specific,
+% but the argument of \cs{At@startsection} is style specific.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\At@startsection}[1]{%
+ \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ Usage of deprecated command `\string\At@startsection'
+ mapped to\MessageBreak
+ `\string\AddtoDoHook{heading/postinit}
+ {...\string\@gobble}'%
+ }%
+ \AddtoDoHook{heading/postinit}{\scr@doonlyifstyleofargis{#1}{section}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@doonlyifstyleofargis}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/04}{added}
+% Execute the first argument only, of the style of the third argument is the
+% second argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@doonlyifstyleofargis}[3]{%
+ \IfSectionCommandStyleIs{#3}{#2}{#1}{}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@doonlyifstyleofargis
+% \end{macro}^^A \At@startsection
+% \begin{macro}{\Before@ssect}
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/11}{added}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/04}{using \cs{AddtoDoHook}}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/04}{deprecated}
+% \changes{v3.35}{2021/10/15}{\cs{ClassWarning} instead of \cs{ClassInfo}}
+% \changes{v3.35}{2021/10/15}{Usage of \cs{scr@doonlyifstyleofargis} fixed}
+% This is deprecated now. You should use the corresponding
+% \dhook{heading/branch/star} do hook. However the do hooks are command
+% specific, but the argument of \cs{Before@ssect} is style specific.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\Before@ssect}[1]{%
+ \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ Usage of deprecated command `\string\Before@ssect'
+ mapped to\MessageBreak
+ `\string\AddtoDoHook{heading/branch/star}%
+ {...\string\@gobble}'%
+ }%
+ \AddtoDoHook{heading/branch/star}{\scr@doonlyifstyleofargis{#1}{section}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \Before@ssect
+% \begin{macro}{\Before@sect}
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/11}{added}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/04}{using \cs{AddtoDoHook}}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/04}{deprecated}
+% \changes{v3.35}{2021/10/15}{\cs{ClassWarning} instead of \cs{ClassInfo}}
+% \changes{v3.35}{2021/10/15}{Usage of \cs{scr@doonlyifstyleofargis} fixed}
+% This is deprecated now. You should use the corresponding
+% \dhook{heading/branch/nostar} do hook. However the do hooks are command
+% specific, but the argument of \cs{Before@sect} is style specific.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\Before@sect}[1]{%
+ \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ Usage of deprecated command `\string\Before@sect'
+ mapped to\MessageBreak
+ `\string\AddtoDoHook{heading/branch/nostar}%
+ {...\string\@gobble}'%
+ }%
+ \AddtoDoHook{heading/branch/nostar}{\scr@doonlyifstyleofargis{#1}{section}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \Before@sect
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@section@dblarg,\scr@section@xdblarg}
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{added}
+% Similar to the \LaTeX{} kernel macros \cs{@dblarg} and \cs{@xdblarg} but
+% preserve the definition of \cs{scr@osectarg}. So changes of
+% \cs{scr@osectarg} inside the definition of the command of the first
+% argument, are locally to the execution of that command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\scr@section@dblarg}[1]{%
+ \kernel@ifnextchar[%]
+ {#1}%
+ {\scr@section@xdblarg{#1}}%
+}
+\newcommand{\scr@section@xdblarg}[2]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \unexpanded{\endgroup\let\scr@osectarg\z@#1[{#2}]{#2}\def\scr@osectarg}%
+ {\scr@osectarg}}%
+ \reserved@a
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@section@dblarg,\scr@section@xdblarg
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@saved@startsection
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@startsection
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Currently we still redefine \cs{@startsection} to use either
+% \cs{scr@saced@startsection} or \cs{scr@startsection}. But it would be
+% better to not redefine a \LaTeX{} kernel macro. However, if not doing so,
+% packages, that use \cs{@startsection} would not support \KOMAScript{}
+% features without detecting \KOMAScript{} and using \cs{scr@startsection}.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\@startsection}{%
+ \ifnum \scr@osectarg=\z@
+ \expandafter\scr@saved@startsection
+ \else
+ \expandafter\scr@startsection
+ \fi
+}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \@startsection
+%
+% \begin{command}{\UseNumberUsageError}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{added}
+% \begin{command}{\IfUseNumber}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{error if used outside sectioning command}
+% Command \cs{IfUseNumner} is defined only inside sectioning commands. Using
+% it outside is not specified. To report an error in this case, it should be
+% set to \cs{UseNumberUsageError} outside a sectioning command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\UseNumberUsageError}[2]{%
+ \ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ \string\IfUseNumber\space not allowed%
+ }{%
+ You cannot use \string\IfUseNumber\space outside a heading.\MessageBreak
+ If you'd continue, I'll ignore both arguments, because I do not
+ know\MessageBreak
+ whether to use the first or the second argument.%
+ }%
+}
+\newcommand*{\IfUseNumber}[2]{}%
+\let\IfUseNumber\UseNumberUsageError
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \IfUseNumnr
+% \end{command}^^A \UseNumberUsageError
+%
+%
+% \begin{command}{\SecDef}
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{added}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} replaced by \cs{kernel@ifstar}}
+% \begin{command}{\secdef}
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{re-definition because of extended optional argument}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\SecDef}[2]{\kernel@ifstar{#2}{\scr@section@dblarg{#1}}}
+\CheckCommand*{\secdef}[2]{\@ifstar{#2}{\@dblarg{#1}}}
+\let\secdef\SecDef
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \secdef
+% \end{command}^^A \SecDef
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@sect}
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{removed}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@sect
+% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{re-definition because of extended optional argument}
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{using
+% \cs{csname}\texttt{add\#1tocentry}\cs{endcsname}
+% resp. \cs{addtocentrydefault}}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{defines \cs{IfUsePrefixLine} locally}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{using \cs{numexpr} for argument 2}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{using \cs{gluexpr} for arguments 3--5}
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/17}{using \cs{sectionlinesformat} and
+% \cs{sectioncatchphraseformat}}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/08}{new optional \opt{nonumber}}
+% \changes{v3.30}{2020/02/25}{orphan spaces removed}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@latex@sect}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/24}{added to be used by \pkg*{scrhack}}
+% Because we want to support the extended optional argument for all commands
+% defined using \cs{@startsection} we also have to redefine \cs{@sect}. Once
+% again several security tests are done, before redefining an internal
+% \LaTeX{} kernel macro.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] It would be better not to redefine an internal \LaTeX{} kernel
+% macro, but use a own definition in our own \cs{scr@startsection}. But in
+% this case packages, that use \cs{@sect} would not automatically support
+% several \KOMAScript{} features.
+% \item[Note:] \cs{chapter} and \cs{part} do not use \cs{@sect} but
+% \cs{SecDef}.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\def\scr@latex@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
+ \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
+ \let\@svsec\@empty
+ \else
+ \refstepcounter{#1}%
+ \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%
+ \fi
+ \@tempskipa #5\relax
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
+ \begingroup
+ #6{%
+ \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}%
+ \interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}%
+ \endgroup
+ \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
+ \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
+ \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+ \fi
+ #7}%
+ \else
+ \def\@svsechd{%
+ #6{\hskip #3\relax
+ \@svsec #8}%
+ \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
+ \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
+ \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+ \fi
+ #7}}%
+ \fi
+ \@xsect{#5}}
+\ifx\@sect\scr@latex@sect\else
+ \let\scr@latex@sect\@sect
+ \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ Unexpected definition of \string\@sect!\MessageBreak
+ Please send information about this to\MessageBreak
+ the KOMA-Script maintainer!\MessageBreak
+ Maybe LaTeX will be broken by the redefinition\MessageBreak
+ of \string\@sect}%
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@latex@sect
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<trace>\ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{redefining LaTeX kernel macro \string\@sect}
+\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
+ \ifnum \scr@osectarg=\z@
+ \@scr@tempswafalse
+ \else
+ \scr@istest#7=\@nil
+ \fi
+ \@currentusenumbertrue
+ \if@scr@tempswa
+ \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#8},head={#8},reference={#8},#7}%
+ \else
+ \ifcase \scr@osectarg\relax
+ \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#7},head={#7},reference={#7}}%
+ \or
+ \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#8},head={#7},reference={#8}}%
+ \or
+ \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#7},head={#8},reference={#7}}%
+ \or
+ \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#7},head={#7},reference={#7}}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/04}{support for \pkg{minitoc}}
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/03/24}{usage of \cs{ext@figure} and \cs{ext@table}
+% instead of \texttt{lof} and \texttt{lot}}
+% Add the \texttt{xsect} entries to \texttt{lof} and \texttt{lot}. Note, that
+% the original \cs{starsection} tests of \pkg{minitoc} has a bug and so
+% does not work. And the original code of \pkg{minitoc} has hard coded
+% \texttt{lot} and \texttt{lof} instead of \cs{ext@figure} and
+% \cs{ext@table}. This is a fixed one:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@mt@saved@sect}{}{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section
+ \addcontentsline{\ext@figure}{xsect}{\@currenttocentry}%
+ \addcontentsline{\ext@table}{xsect}{\@currenttocentry}%
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection\relax
+ \addcontentsline{\ext@figure}{xsect}{\@currenttocentry}%
+ \addcontentsline{\ext@table}{xsect}{\@currenttocentry}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \let\IfUsePrefixLine\@secondoftwo
+ \ifcase
+ \if@currentusenumber
+ \ifnum \numexpr #2\relax>\c@secnumdepth \z@\else \@ne\fi
+ \else
+ \z@
+ \fi
+ \let\@svsec\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.31}{2020/06/02}{execute counter reset list}
+% Even for not numbered sections, the reset list für the section counter has
+% to be executed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@lt{3.31}\relax\else
+ \begingroup
+ \let\@elt\@stpelt
+ \csname cl@#1\endcsname
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.31}{2020/06/02}{\cs{hy@insteadofrefstepcounter} added}
+% At this point we have to make sure, that the \pkg{hyperref} code for not
+% increasing a counter is executed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \hy@insteadofrefstepcounter{#1}%
+ \else
+ \refstepcounter{#1}%
+ \expandafter\@maybeautodot\csname the#1\endcsname
+ \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{support for \cs{scr@sect@runin}}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{\cs{IfUseNumber} defined locally}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim
+ \scr@sect@runin{\z@}{\p@}{\glueexpr #5\relax}>\z@
+ \begingroup
+ \ifx\@svsec\@empty
+ \let\IfUseNumber\@secondoftwo
+ \else
+ \let\IfUseNumber\@firstoftwo
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{missing \cs{nobreak} added}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{\cs{scr@do@at} added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/begingroup/#1}%
+ #6{\nobreak\interlinepenalty \@M
+ \sectionlinesformat{#1}{\glueexpr #3\relax}\@svsec{#8}\@@par}%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/endgroup/#1}%
+ \endgroup
+%<*trace>
+ \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ head=`\detokenize\expandafter{\@currentheadentry}'\MessageBreak
+ tocentry=`\detokenize\expandafter{\@currenttocentry}'\MessageBreak
+ reference=`\detokenize\expandafter{\@currentlabelname}'}%
+%</trace>
+ \expandafter\csname #1mark\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter{\@currentheadentry}%
+ \ifx\@currenttocentry\@empty\else
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{add#1tocentry}{%
+ \expandafter\gdef\csname add#1tocentry\endcsname##1##2{%
+ \addtocentrydefault{#1}{##1}{##2}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \ifcase
+ \if@currentusenumber
+ \ifnum \numexpr #2\relax>\c@secnumdepth \z@\else \@ne\fi
+ \else
+ \z@
+ \fi
+ \csname add#1tocentry\endcsname{}{\@currenttocentry}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.31}{2020/06/06}{using \cs{\dots tocformat}}%
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Move \cs{autodot} to the definition of \cs{\dots tocformat}.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{#1tocformat}{%
+ \expandafter\gdef\csname #1tocformat\endcsname
+ {\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+ }{}%
+ \csname add#1tocentry\endcsname{\csname #1tocformat\endcsname}{%
+ \@currenttocentry}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{missing \cs{nobreak} added}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{\cs{ExecuteDoHook} added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@svsechd{%
+ \ifx\@svsec\@empty
+ \let\IfUseNumber\@secondoftwo
+ \else
+ \let\IfUseNumber\@firstoftwo
+ \fi
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/begingroup/#1}%
+ #6{\nobreak\sectioncatchphraseformat{#1}{\glueexpr #3\relax}\@svsec{#8}}%
+%<*trace>
+ \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ head=`\detokenize\expandafter{\@currentheadentry}'\MessageBreak
+ tocentry=`\detokenize\expandafter{\@currenttocentry}'\MessageBreak
+ reference=`\detokenize\expandafter{\@currentlabelname}'}%
+%</trace>
+ \expandafter\csname #1mark\expandafter\endcsname
+ \expandafter{\@currentheadentry}%
+ \ifx\@currenttocentry\@empty\else
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{add#1tocentry}{%
+ \expandafter\gdef\csname add#1tocentry\endcsname####1####2{%
+ \addtocentrydefault{#1}{####1}{####2}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \ifcase
+ \if@currentusenumber
+ \ifnum \numexpr #2\relax>\c@secnumdepth \z@\else \@ne\fi
+ \else
+ \z@
+ \fi
+ \csname add#1tocentry\endcsname{}{\@currenttocentry}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.31}{2020/06/06}{using \cs{\dots tocformat}}%
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Move \cs{autodot} to the definition of \cs{\dots tocformat}.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{#1tocformat}{%
+ \expandafter\gdef\csname #1tocformat\endcsname
+ {\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+ }{}%
+ \csname add#1tocentry\endcsname{\csname #1tocformat\endcsname}{%
+ \@currenttocentry}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/endgroup/#1}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \let\IfUsePrefixLine\scr@IfUsePrefixLineWarning
+ \@xsect{\glueexpr #5\relax}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@ds@tocentry,\@currenttocentry}
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{added}
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/12}{\cs{scr@ds@tocentry} renamed to \cs{@currenttocentry}}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@ds@head,\@currentheadentry}
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{added}
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/12}{\cs{scr@ds@head} renamed to \cs{@currentheadentry}}
+% \begin{macro}{\@currentlabelname}
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/12}{added}
+% \begin{macro}{\@scr@tempswatrue,\@scr@tempswafalse,\if@scr@tempswa}
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{added}
+% \begin{macro}{\@currentusenumbertrue,\@currentusenumberfalse,\if@currentusenumber}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/08}{added}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@istest}
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{added}
+% We are using several \pkg*{scrbase} options to handle the extended
+% optional argument features.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Is there a general initialization hook to make additional such
+% options at package author level possible?
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DefineFamily{KOMAarg}
+\DefineFamilyMember[.section]{KOMAarg}
+\providecommand*\@currenttocentry{}
+\providecommand*\@currentheadentry{}
+\providecommand*\@currentlabelname{}
+\FamilyStringKey[.section]{KOMAarg}{tocentry}{\@currenttocentry}
+\FamilyStringKey[.section]{KOMAarg}{head}{\@currentheadentry}
+\DefineFamilyKey[.section]{KOMAarg}{reference}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{NR@gettitle}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{GetTitleString}{%
+ \def\@currentlabelname{#1}%
+ }{%
+ \GetTitleString{#1}%
+ \let\@currentlabelname\GetTitleStringResult
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \NR@gettitle{#1}%
+ }%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{TR@gettitle}{}{%
+ \expandafter\TR@gettitle\expandafter{\@currentlabelname}%
+ }%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{ztitlerefsetup}{}{%
+ \ztitlerefsetup{title=\@currentlabelname}%
+ }%
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+}
+\FamilyInverseBoolKey[.section]{KOMAarg}{nonumber}{@currentusenumber}
+\newcommand*{\scr@istest}{}
+\def\scr@istest#1=#2\@nil{%
+ \ifx\relax#2\relax\@scr@tempswafalse\else\@scr@tempswatrue\fi
+}
+\newif\if@scr@tempswa
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@istest
+% \end{macro}^^A \if@currentusenumber
+% \end{macro}^^A \if@scr@tempswa
+% \end{macro}^^A \@currentlabelname
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@ds@head,\@currentheadentry
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@ds@tocentry,\@currenttocentry
+%
+% \begin{command}{\sectionlinesformat,\sectioncatchphraseformat}
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/17}{added}
+% Headings with style \texttt{section} can either be free-standing or
+% in-line. Free-standing headings are printed using:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{sectionlinesformat}\marg{level name}\marg{indent}\marg{number}\marg{text}
+% \end{quote}
+% The in-line headings are printed using:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{sectioncatchphraseformat}\marg{level name}\marg{indent}\marg{number}\marg{text}
+% \end{quote}
+% The \meta{level name} can also be interpreted as the section command
+% name. The \meta{indent} is the horizontal indent of the first line of the
+% heading. The \meta{number} is either empty for not numbered headings or the
+% formatted number to be used. \meta{text} is the formatted text to be
+% used. Formatted text means, the fonts are already set and \cs{@@par} for the
+% end of paragraph already has been added to the \meta{text} of
+% \cs{sectionlinesformat}. But if the user uses more paragraphs than this
+% final one, the user is responsible to prevent page breaks!
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] Argument \meta{indent} is a kind of design mistake. It would
+% have been better to get the indent by the attributes of the \meta{level
+% name}. However having an argument makes it easier for users to redefine
+% the command.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\sectionlinesformat}[4]{%
+ \@hangfrom{\hskip #2#3}{#4}%
+}
+\newcommand{\sectioncatchphraseformat}[4]{%
+ \hskip #2#3#4%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \sectionlinesformat,\sectioncatchphraseformat
+% \end{macro}^^A \@sect
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/17}{re-definition because of several new features}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@latex@ssect}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/24}{added to be used by \pkg*{scrhack})}
+% \changes{v3.30}{2020/02/25}{orphan space removed}
+% The star variant of section commands do not use \cs{@sect} but
+% \cs{@ssect}. Here we have the problem, that the command name argument is
+% missing. The whole definition is very similar to \cs{@sect} but without a
+% number, ToC entry or running head.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] we do not have to support an extended optional argument,
+% because there isn't an optional argument.
+% \item[ToDo:] It would be better not to redefine an internal \LaTeX{} kernel
+% macro, but use a own definition in our own \cs{scr@startsection}. But in
+% this case packages, that use \cs{@ssect} would not automatically support
+% several \KOMAScript{} features.
+% \item[Note:] \cs{chapter} and \cs{part} do not use \cs{@ssect} but
+% \cs{SecDef}.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\scr@latex@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \@tempskipa #3\relax
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
+ \begingroup
+ #4{%
+ \@hangfrom{\hskip #1}%
+ \interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}%
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5}}%
+ \fi
+ \@xsect{#3}}
+\ifx\@ssect\scr@latex@ssect
+\else
+ \let\scr@latex@ssect\@ssect
+ \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ Unexpected definition of \string\@ssect!\MessageBreak
+ Please send information about this to\MessageBreak
+ the KOMA-Script maintainer!\MessageBreak
+ Maybe LaTeX will be broken by the redefinition\MessageBreak
+ of \string\@ssect}%
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@latex@ssect
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<trace>\ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{redefining LaTeX kernel macro
+%<trace> \string\@ssect}
+\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@s@ct@@nn@m@}{%
+ \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{Incompatible usage of
+ \string\@ssect\space detected.\MessageBreak
+ You've used the KOMA-Script implementation of
+ \string\@ssect\MessageBreak
+ from within a non compatible caller, that does not\MessageBreak
+ \string\scr@s@ct@@nn@m@\space locally.\MessageBreak
+ This could result in several error messages}%
+ \def\scr@s@ct@@nn@m@{\string\scr@s@ct@@nn@m@}%
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.31}{2020/06/02}{execute counter reset list}
+% Even for not numbered sections, the reset list für the corresponding section
+% counter has to be executed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@lt{3.31}\relax\else
+ \begingroup
+ \let\@elt\@stpelt
+ \csname cl@\scr@s@ct@@nn@m@\endcsname
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{support for \cs{scr@sect@runin}}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{defining \cs{IfUseNumber} locally}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim
+ \scr@sect@runin{\z@}{\p@}{\glueexpr #3\relax}>\z@
+ \begingroup
+ \let\IfUseNumber\@secondoftwo
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{missing \cs{nobreak} added}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{\cs{ExecuteDoHook} added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\ExecuteDoHook{heading/begingroup/\scr@s@ct@@nn@m@}%
+ }\reserved@a
+ #4{\nobreak\interlinepenalty \@M
+ \expandafter\sectionlinesformat\expandafter{\scr@s@ct@@nn@m@}%
+ {\glueexpr #1\relax}\@empty{#5}\@@par}%
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\ExecuteDoHook{heading/endgroup/\scr@s@ct@@nn@m@}%
+ }\reserved@a
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \edef\@svsechd{%
+ \unexpanded{\let\IfUseNumber\@secondoftwo}%
+ \noexpand\ExecuteDoHook{heading/begingroup/\scr@s@ct@@nn@m@}%
+ \unexpanded{#4}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{missing \cs{nobreak} added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \noexpand\nobreak
+ \noexpand\sectioncatchphraseformat{\scr@s@ct@@nn@m@}%
+ \unexpanded{{\glueexpr #1\relax}\@empty{#5}}%
+ }%
+ \noexpand\ExecuteDoHook{heading/endgroup/\scr@s@ct@@nn@m@}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \let\scr@s@ct@@nn@m@\relax
+ \@xsect{\glueexpr #3\relax}%
+}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \@ssect
+% \begin{macro}{\@xsect}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{re-definition}
+% \changes{v3.30}{2020/02/25}{orphan space removed}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@latex@xsect}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/24}{added to be used by \pkg*{scrhack}}
+% We need a differentiation with \cs{scr@sect@runin} to be initialized in
+% \cs{@xsect} and also need to reset this internal macro at the end.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] It would be better not to redefine the internal \LaTeX{} kernel
+% macro, but to define and use our own one.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\def\scr@latex@xsect#1{%
+ \@tempskipa #1\relax
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
+ \par \nobreak
+ \vskip \@tempskipa
+ \@afterheading
+ \else
+ \@nobreakfalse
+ \global\@noskipsectrue
+ \everypar{%
+ \if@noskipsec
+ \global\@noskipsecfalse
+ {\setbox\z@\lastbox}%
+ \clubpenalty\@M
+ \begingroup \@svsechd \endgroup
+ \unskip
+ \@tempskipa #1\relax
+ \hskip -\@tempskipa
+ \else
+ \clubpenalty \@clubpenalty
+ \everypar{}%
+ \fi}%
+ \fi
+ \ignorespaces
+}
+\ifx\@xsect\scr@latex@xsect\else
+ \let\scr@latex@xsect\@xsect
+ \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ Unexpected definition of \string\@xsect!\MessageBreak
+ Please send information about this to\MessageBreak
+ the KOMA-Script maintainer!\MessageBreak
+ Maybe LaTeX will be broken by the redefinition\MessageBreak
+ of \string\@xsect}%
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@latex@xsect
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<trace>\ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{redefining LaTeX kernel macro
+%<trace> \string\@xsect}
+\def\@xsect#1{%
+ \@ifundefined{scr@sect@runin}{%
+ \def\scr@sect@runin##1##2##3{##3}%
+ }%
+ \@tempskipa #1\relax
+ \ifdim \scr@sect@runin{\z@}{\p@}{\@tempskipa}>\z@
+ \par \nobreak
+ \vskip \@tempskipa
+ \@afterheading
+ \else
+ \@nobreakfalse
+ \global\@noskipsectrue
+ \everypar{%
+ \if@noskipsec
+ \global\@noskipsecfalse
+ {\setbox\z@\lastbox}%
+ \clubpenalty\@M
+ \begingroup \@svsechd \endgroup
+ \unskip
+ \@tempskipa #1\relax
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa<\z@
+ \hskip -\@tempskipa
+ \else
+ \hskip \@tempskipa
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \clubpenalty \@clubpenalty
+ \everypar{}%
+ \fi}%
+ \fi
+ \def\scr@sect@runin##1##2##3{##3}%
+ \ignorespaces
+}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \@xsect
+%
+% \begin{command}{\IfUsePrefixLine}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/09}{added}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@IfUsePrefixLineWarning}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/09}{added}
+% This command makes sense inside the section commands only. But users often
+% tried to use it outside instead of \cs{ifnumbered}. This mostly has resulted
+% in a undefined command sequence error users did not understand. So now, we
+% use an internal definition to be uses outside the section commands, that
+% results in a warning with more information about the mistake and that does
+% neither use the first nor the second argument (instead of using both of them).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\scr@IfUsePrefixLineWarning}[2]{%
+ \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ Usage of \string\IfUsePrefixLine\space outside
+ section command\MessageBreak
+ style makes no sense, because the behaviour not only\MessageBreak
+ depends on class options but also on the run-time\MessageBreak
+ section command style.\MessageBreak
+ Neither the then-code nor the else-code will be\MessageBreak
+ executed.\MessageBreak
+ You may change this and avoid the warning by LOCALLY\MessageBreak
+ setting \string\IfUsePrefixLine\space to either
+ \string\@firstoftwo\space or\MessageBreak
+ \string\@secondoftwo\space before using it%
+ }%
+}
+\newcommand*{\IfUsePrefixLine}[2]{}
+\let\IfUsePrefixLine\scr@IfUsePrefixLineWarning
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@IfUsePrefixLineWarning
+% \end{command}^^A \IfUsePrefixLine
+%
+%
+% \begin{command}{\raggedsection}
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1996/01/20}{added}
+% Should be either \cs{raggedleft}, \cs{raggedright}, \cs{centering} or
+% empty. Empty means no change, which is usually justified. Users could also
+% use other alignment/justification commands like the commands of package
+% \pkg{ragged2e}. The initial value is \cs{raggedright}.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] We are here in the class. So usually \cs{raggedright} is the
+% \cs{raggedright} of the \LaTeX{} kernel. This also means: no hyphenation.
+% \item[Note:] We define is already here, because it is not only used for
+% style \texttt{section} but also as initial default of the \emph{higher
+% level} styles.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\raggedsection}{}
+\let\raggedsection\raggedright
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \raggedsection
+%
+%
+% All the options of \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} are options of family
+% \texttt{KOMAarg} member \texttt{.dsc}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\DefineFamily{KOMAarg}
+\DefineFamilyMember[.dsc]{KOMAarg}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{command}{\DeclareSectionCommandStyleOption}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{added}
+% \begin{command}{\AddToSectionCommandOptionsDoList,\RelaxSectionCommandOptions}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{added}
+% \begin{macro}{\@AddToSectionCommandOptionsDoList,\scr@dsc@doopts}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{added}
+% The basic command to define a section command style option is:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommandStyleOption}\marg{style}\marg{option}\marg{definition}
+% \end{quote}
+% Is similar to a corresponding \cs{DefineFamilyKey}. But the option
+% definition is not done immediately but added to
+% \cs{scr@dsc@style@\meta{style}@options} which is executed later inside
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} after detection of the \opt{style} option. The
+% option is also added to the \emph{section command options do list} of
+% \cs{scr@dsc@doopts} using
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{AddToSectionCommandOptionsDoList}\marg{option}
+% \end{quote}
+% This is used, e.g., to relax all options inside \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}
+% using \cs{RelaxSectionCommandOptions} to not have options defined, that are
+% used by one style, while declaring a command of another style, that does not
+% support the option.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] We also could have used another option member for every style
+% to avoid such problems. With \LaTeX3 also usage of
+% \pkg[https://www.ctan.org/pkg/l3kernel]{l3keys}, which provides a kind of
+% hierarchical options, would have been possible.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\DeclareSectionCommandStyleOption}[3]{%
+ \AddToSectionCommandOptionsDoList{#2}%
+ \expandafter\g@addto@macro\csname scr@dsc@style@#1@options\endcsname{%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{#2}{#3}%
+ }%
+}
+\newcommand*{\AddToSectionCommandOptionsDoList}[1]{%
+ \kernel@ifnextchar [%]
+ {\@AddToSectionCommandOptionListWithDefault{#1}}%
+ {\l@addto@macro\scr@dsc@doopts{\do{#1}}}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\@AddToSectionCommandOptionListWithDefault}{}
+\def\@AddToSectionCommandOptionListWithDefault#1[#2]{%
+ \l@addto@macro\scr@dsc@doopts{\do[{#2}]{#1}}
+}%
+\newcommand*{\scr@dsc@doopts}{}
+\newcommand*{\RelaxSectionCommandOptions}{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\do@endgroup{\endgroup}%
+ \def\do{%
+ \kernel@ifnextchar [%]
+ {\@do}%
+ {\@do[]}%
+ }%
+ \def\@do[##1]##2{%
+ \l@addto@macro\do@endgroup{\RelaxFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{##2}}%
+ }%
+ \scr@dsc@doopts
+ \do@endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \@AddToSectionCommandOptionsListWithDefault,\scr@dsc@dooptions
+% \end{command}^^A \AddToSectionCommandOptionsDoList,\RelaxSectionCommandOptions
+% \end{command}^^A \DeclareSectionCommandStyleOption
+% We provide several kinds of options:
+% \begin{command}{\DeclareSectionCommandDummyOption}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{added}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{removed}
+% \end{command}^^A \DeclareSectionCommandDummyOption
+% \begin{command}{\DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption,
+% \DeclareSectionCommandStyleNumberOption,
+% \DeclareSectionCommandStyleFontOption}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{added}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/25}{argument expansion}
+% All these commands have the four arguments:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \marg{style}\marg{option}\marg{prefix}\marg{postfix}
+% \end{quote}
+% Most of the commands all correspond to \pkg*{scrbase} option declaration
+% commands:
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{lll}
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} & \pkg*{scrbase} & meaning \\\hline
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption}
+% & \cs{FamilyLengthMacroKey} & length option\\
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommandStyleNumberOption}
+% & \cs{FamilyCounterMacroKey} & numerical option\\
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommandStyleFontOption}
+% & & font element option\\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% The \meta{macro} of the corresponding \pkg*{scrbase} command is build by
+% \meta{prefix}\cs{scr@dsc@current}\meta{postfix}. For
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommandStyleOption} the build name is the font
+% element instead. However, before using (setting) the option,
+% \cs{scr@dsc@current} has to be defined to be \meta{level name}
+% (aka \emph{section command name}). Depending on \cs{ifscr@dsc@expandtopt}
+% (see option \opt{expandtopt}) lengths given as argument to the option of
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption} is expanded to a \texttt{pt}
+% value instead of used as it is.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption}[4]{%
+ \DeclareSectionCommandStyleOption{#1}{#2}{%
+ \protected@edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\FamilySetLength{KOMAarg}{#2}{\noexpand\@tempskipa}{##1}%
+ }\reserved@a
+ \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ \ifscr@dsc@expandtopt
+ \expandafter\edef\csname #3\scr@dsc@current#4\endcsname{%
+ \the\@tempskipa}%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\edef\csname #3\scr@dsc@current#4\endcsname{##1}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+\newcommand*{\DeclareSectionCommandStyleNumberOption}[4]{%
+ \DeclareSectionCommandStyleOption{#1}{#2}{%
+ \protected@edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\FamilySetCounterMacro{KOMAarg}{#2}{\noexpand\reserved@a}{##1}
+ }\reserved@a
+ \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ \expandafter\let\csname #3\scr@dsc@current#4\endcsname\reserved@a
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+\newcommand*{\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFontOption}[4]{%
+ \DeclareSectionCommandStyleOption{#1}{#2}{%
+ \IfExistskomafont{#3\scr@dsc@current#4}{%
+ \setkomafont
+ }{%
+ \newkomafont
+ }{#3\scr@dsc@current#4}{##1}%
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption …
+% \begin{command}{\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFuzzyOption}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{added}
+% \changes{v3.28}{2019/11/18}{\cs{ifstr} renamed to \cs{Ifstr}}
+% We also have a kind of fuzzy option. A fuzzy option defined by
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommandStyleFuzzyOption}\meta{style}\meta{option}%
+% \meta{prefix}\meta{postfix}\meta{also}
+% \end{quote}
+% is an option, that provides three values: \texttt{true} (and the aliases
+% \texttt{on} and \texttt{yes}), \texttt{false} (and the aliases \texttt{off}
+% and \texttt{no}), and a third one \meta{also}. It defines a macro with the
+% name \meta{prefix}\cs{scr@dsc@current}\meta{postfix} and three arguments. If
+% the option is true, the macro expands to the first argument. If the option
+% is false, the macro expands to the second argument. If the option is
+% \meta{also} the macro expands to the third argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFuzzyOption}[5]{%
+ \DeclareSectionCommandStyleOption{#1}{#2}{%
+ \FamilySetBool{KOMAarg}{#2}{@tempswa}{##1}%
+ \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ \if@tempswa
+ \expandafter\def\csname #3\scr@dsc@current#4\endcsname
+ ####1####2####3{####1}%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\def\csname #3\scr@dsc@current#4\endcsname
+ ####1####2####3{####2}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \Ifstr{##1}{#5}{%
+ \expandafter\def\csname #3\scr@dsc@current#4\endcsname
+ ####1####2####3{####3}%
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }{}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \DeclareSectionCommandStyleFuzzyOptions
+%
+% These types of options are used to define all the options of a style, e.g.,
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@dsc@style@section@options}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{added}
+% the option declarations of style \texttt{section}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@dsc@style@section@options}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{indent=\meta{length}}:]
+% the left indent of the heading.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption{section}
+ {indent}{scr@}{@sectionindent}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{afterindent=\meta{fuzzy}}:]
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{option \opt{afterindent}}
+% fuzzy logic. A boolean value states whether to indent the first line
+% after the heading. With additional \opt{afterindent=bysign} the decision
+% depends on the sign of \opt{beforeskip}. Negative values of
+% \opt{beforeskip} result in no paragraph indent.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFuzzyOption{section}
+ {afterindent}{scr@}{@afterindent}
+ {bysign}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{beforeskip=\meta{length}}:]
+% The vertical distance before the heading. If \opt{afterindent=bysign}, the
+% absolute value of \meta{length} is used. Otherwise the \meta{length} can
+% also be negative to move up the heading.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption{section}
+ {beforeskip}{scr@}{@beforeskip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{runin=\meta{fuzzy}}:]
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{option \opt{runin}}
+% fuzzy logic. A boolean value states whether the heading is run-in (or
+% free-standing). With additional \opt{runin=bysign} the decision depends on
+% the sign of \opt{afterskip}. Negative values of \opt{afterskip} result in
+% a run-in heading.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFuzzyOption{section}
+ {runin}{scr@}{@runin}
+ {bysign}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{afterskip=\meta{length}}:]
+% In case of a run-in heading (see option \opt{runin}) the horizontal
+% distance after the heading. In case of a free-standing heading the
+% vertical distance after the heading. If the run-in heading is activated by
+% a negative \meta{length}, the absolute value is used. Otherwise the
+% \meta{length} can also be negative, which usually does not make much
+% sense.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption{section}
+ {afterskip}{scr@}{@afterskip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{font=\meta{font settings}}:]
+% The font setting for the font element of the heading.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFontOption{section}{font}{}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dsc@style@section@options
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@dsc@def@style@section@command}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/21}{added}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/19}{inline section test fixed}
+% Macro
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@section@command}\marg{command name}
+% \end{quote}
+% defines a section command \cs{\meta{command name}} of style
+% \texttt{section}.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] Here we already use our own \cs{scr@startsection} instead of
+% \cs{@startsection}. So maybe not redefining \cs{@startsection} or
+% redefining \cs{@startsection} only optionally wouldn't be a big step.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@dsc@def@style@section@command}[1]{%
+ \@namedef{#1}{%
+ \scr@startsection{#1}%
+ {\csname #1numdepth\endcsname}%
+ {\csname scr@#1@sectionindent\endcsname}%
+ {\csname scr@#1@beforeskip\endcsname}%
+ {\csname scr@#1@afterskip\endcsname}%
+ {%
+ \ifdim\glueexpr\csname scr@#1@afterskip\endcsname >\z@
+ \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@gt{2.96}\relax
+ \setlength{\parfillskip}{\z@ plus 1fil}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \raggedsection\normalfont\sectfont\nobreak
+ \usekomafont{#1}%
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dsc@def@style@section@command
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@dsc@style@chapter@options}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{added}
+% Now, the option declaration of style \texttt{chapter} (similar, but not the
+% same):
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*book|report>
+\newcommand*{\scr@dsc@style@chapter@options}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{pagestyle=\meta{name}}:]
+% The page style, that should be used for the starting page of the chapter
+% like outline level.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareSectionCommandStyleOption{chapter}{pagestyle}{%
+ \@namedef{\scr@dsc@current pagestyle}{#1}%
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{afterindent=\meta{fuzzy}}:]
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{option \opt{afterindent}}
+% fuzzy logic. A boolean value states whether to indent the first line
+% after the heading. With additional \opt{afterindent=bysign} the decision
+% depends on the sign of \opt{beforeskip}. Negative values of
+% \opt{beforeskip} result in no paragraph indent.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFuzzyOption{chapter}
+ {afterindent}{scr@}{@afterindent}
+ {bysign}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{beforeskip=\meta{length}}:]
+% The vertical distance before the heading. If \opt{afterindent=bysign}, the
+% absolute value of \meta{length} is used. Otherwise the \meta{length} can
+% also be negative to move up the heading.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption{chapter}
+ {beforeskip}{scr@}{@beforeskip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{innerskip=\meta{length}}:]
+% The vertical distance between the prefix line and the text (if a prefix
+% line is used).
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption{chapter}
+ {innerskip}{scr@}{@innerskip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{afterskip=\meta{length}}:]
+% The vertical distance after the heading.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption{chapter}
+ {afterskip}{scr@}{@afterskip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{font=\meta{font settings}}:]
+% The font setting for the font element of the heading.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFontOption{chapter}{font}{}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{prefixfont=\meta{font settings}}:]
+% The font setting for the font element of the prefix line of the heading.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFontOption{chapter}{prefixfont}{}{prefix}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dsc@style@chapter@options
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{added}
+% Macro
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}\marg{command name}
+% \end{quote}
+% defines a section command \cs{\meta{command name}} of style
+% \texttt{chapter}. We need some more macros to be initialized than with
+% \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@section@command}.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Make a more generic (and general) interface for this.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}[1]{%
+ \@namedef{#1}{\scr@startchapter{#1}}%
+ \@namedef{@#1}{\scr@@startchapter{#1}}%
+ \@namedef{@s#1}{\scr@@startschapter{#1}}%
+ \@namedef{@make#1head}{\scr@makechapterhead{#1}}%
+ \@namedef{@makes#1head}{\scr@makeschapterhead{#1}}%
+ \@namedef{@@make#1head}{\scr@@makechapterhead{#1}}%
+ \@namedef{@@makes#1head}{\scr@@makeschapterhead{#1}}%
+ \@namedef{set#1preamble}{\set@preamble{#1}}%
+}
+%</book|report>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@dsc@style@chapter@subcommands}
+% \changes{v3.30}{2020/04/08}{added}
+% Internal name list of additional commands to be defined for style
+% \texttt{chapter} commands. This is used, to decide, if a new section command
+% declaration is really new or already redefines some commands. This should
+% help to avoid, e.g., defining a new chapter command \cs{schapter}, if
+% \cs{chapter} is already defines, because \cs{schapter} would redefine the
+% \cs{@schapter} of \cs{chapter}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@dsc@style@chapter@subcommands}[1]{%
+ @#1,@s#1,@make#1head,@makes#1head,@@make#1head,@@makes#1head,set#1preamble%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dsc@style@chapter@subcommands
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@dsc@style@part@options}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{added}
+% Now the options for style \texttt{part} (very similar to \texttt{chapter}):
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@dsc@style@part@options}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{pagestyle=\meta{name}}:]
+% The page style, that should be used for the starting page of the chapter
+% like outline level.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*report|book>
+\DeclareSectionCommandStyleOption{part}{pagestyle}{%
+ \@namedef{\scr@dsc@current pagestyle}{#1}%
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+}%
+%</report|book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{afterindent=\meta{fuzzy}}:]
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{option \opt{afterindent}}
+% fuzzy logic. A boolean value states whether to indent the first line
+% after the heading. With additional \opt{afterindent=bysign} the decision
+% depends on the sign of \opt{beforeskip}. Negative values of
+% \opt{beforeskip} result in no paragraph indent.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFuzzyOption{part}
+ {afterindent}{scr@}{@afterindent}
+ {bysign}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{beforeskip=\meta{length}}:]
+% The vertical distance before the heading. If \opt{afterindent=bysign}, the
+% absolute value of \meta{length} is used. Otherwise the \meta{length} can
+% also be negative to move up the heading.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption{part}
+ {beforeskip}{scr@}{@beforeskip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{innerskip=\meta{length}}:]
+% The vertical distance between the prefix line and the text (if a prefix
+% line is used).
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*book|report>
+\DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption{part}
+ {innerskip}{scr@}{@innerskip}
+%</book|report>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{afterskip=\meta{length}}:]
+% The vertical distance after the heading.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption{part}
+ {afterskip}{scr@}{@afterskip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{font=\meta{font settings}}:]
+% The font setting for the font element of the heading.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFontOption{part}{font}{}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{prefixfont=\meta{font settings}}:]
+% The font setting for the font element of the prefix line of the heading.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFontOption{part}{prefixfont}{}{prefix}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dsc@style@part@options
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@dsc@def@style@part@command}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{added}
+% Macro
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@part@command}\marg{command name}
+% \end{quote}
+% defines a section command \cs{\meta{command name}} of style
+% \texttt{part}. This looks like a mixture of
+% \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@section@command} and
+% \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Make a more generic (and general) interface for this.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@dsc@def@style@part@command}[1]{%
+ \@namedef{#1}{\scr@startpart{#1}}%
+ \@namedef{@#1}{\scr@@startpart{#1}}%
+ \@namedef{@s#1}{\scr@@startspart{#1}}%
+%<book|report> \@namedef{@end#1}{\scr@@endpart{#1}}%
+%<book|report> \@namedef{set#1preamble}{\set@preamble{#1}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@dsc@style@part@subcommands}
+% \changes{v3.30}{2020/04/08}{added}
+% Internal name list of additional commands to be defined for style
+% \texttt{part} commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@dsc@style@part@subcommands}[1]{%
+ @#1,@s#1,@end#1,set#1preamble%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dsc@style@part@subcommands
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dsc@def@style@part@command
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@dsc@style@section@neededoptionstest}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/24}{added}
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/04/25}{initial values of \opt{indent} and
+% \opt{font}}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{supporting \opt{runin} and \opt{afterindent}}
+% This macro checks, that all attributes needed for the definition of a
+% section command (with style \texttt{section}) are properly setup. If not, an
+% error is reported and the definition is prevented (using
+% \cs{aftergroup}\cs{@gobbletwo} inside \cs{scr@declaresectioncommanderror}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@dsc@style@section@neededoptionstest}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@\scr@dsc@current @sectionindent}{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommandwarning{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {section indent}{indent}{0pt}%
+ {\@namedef{scr@\scr@dsc@current @sectionindent}{0pt}}%
+ }{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@\scr@dsc@current @beforeskip}{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommanderror{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {before section skip}{beforeskip}%
+ }{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@\scr@dsc@current @afterskip}{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommanderror{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {after section skip}{afterskip}%
+ }{}%
+ \IfExistskomafont{\scr@dsc@current}{}{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommandwarning{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {font}{font}{\normalsize}%
+ {\newkomafont{\scr@dsc@current}{\normalsize}}%
+ }%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@\scr@dsc@current @runin}{%
+ \l@addto@macro\local@endgroup{%
+ \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}
+ {using compatibility default `runin=bysign'\MessageBreak
+ for `\expandafter\string\csname \scr@dsc@current\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\gdef\csname scr@\scr@dsc@current @runin\endcsname
+ ##1##2##3{##3}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@\scr@dsc@current @afterindent}{%
+ \l@addto@macro\local@endgroup{%
+ \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}
+ {using compatibility default `afterindent=bysign'\MessageBreak
+ for `\expandafter\string\csname \scr@dsc@current\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\gdef\csname scr@\scr@dsc@current @afterindent\endcsname
+ ##1##2##3{##3}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dsc@style@section@neededoptionstest
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@dsc@style@chapter@neededoptionstest}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/24}{added}
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/04/25}{initial values for all but level
+% \texttt{chapter}}
+% \changes{v3.28}{2019/11/18}{\cs{ifstr} renamed to \cs{Ifstr}}
+% This macro checks, that all attributes needed for the definition of a
+% chapter command (with style \texttt{chapter}) are properly setup. If not, an
+% error is reported and the definition is prevented (using
+% \cs{aftergroup}\cs{@gobbletwo} inside \cs{scr@declaresectioncommanderror}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*book|report>
+\newcommand*{\scr@dsc@style@chapter@neededoptionstest}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{\scr@dsc@current pagestyle}{%
+ \Ifstr{\scr@dsc@current}{chapter}{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommanderror{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {initial page style}{pagestyle}%
+ }{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommandwarning{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {initial page style}{pagestyle}%
+ {\chapterpagestyle}%
+ {\@namedef{\scr@dsc@current pagestyle}{\chapterpagestyle}}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@\scr@dsc@current @innerskip}{%
+ \Ifstr{\scr@dsc@current}{chapter}{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommanderror{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {inner chapter skip}{innerskip}%
+ }{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommandwarning{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {inner chapter skip}{innerskip}%
+ {\scr@chapter@innerskip}%
+ {\@namedef{scr@\scr@dsc@current @innerskip}{\scr@chapter@innerskip}}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@\scr@dsc@current @beforeskip}{%
+ \Ifstr{\scr@dsc@current}{chapter}{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommanderror{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {before chapter skip}{beforeskip}%
+ }{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommandwarning{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {before chapter skip}{beforeskip}%
+ {\scr@chapter@beforeskip}%
+ {\@namedef{scr@\scr@dsc@current @beforeskip}{\scr@chapter@beforeskip}}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@\scr@dsc@current @afterskip}{%
+ \Ifstr{\scr@dsc@current}{chapter}{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommanderror{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {after chaper skip}{afterskip}%
+ }{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommandwarning{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {after chaper skip}{afterskip}%
+ {\scr@chapter@afterskip}%
+ {\@namedef{scr@\scr@dsc@current @afterskip}{\scr@chapter@afterskip}}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \IfExistskomafont{\scr@dsc@current}{}{%
+ \Ifstr{\scr@dsc@current}{chapter}{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommanderror{\scr@dsc@current}{font}{font}%
+ }{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommandwarning{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {font}{font}%
+ {\usekomafont{chapter}}%
+ {\newkomafont{\scr@dsc@current}{\usekomafont{chapter}}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \IfExistskomafont{\scr@dsc@current prefix}{}{%
+ \Ifstr{\scr@dsc@current}{chapter}{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommanderror{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {prefix line font}{prefixfont}%
+ }{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommandwarning{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {prefix line font}{prefixfont}%
+ {\usekomafont{chapterprefix}}%
+ {\newkomafont{\scr@dsc@current prefix}{\usekomafont{chapterprefix}}}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@\scr@dsc@current @afterindent}{%
+ \l@addto@macro\local@endgroup{%
+ \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}
+ {using compatibility default `afterindent=bysign'\MessageBreak
+ for `\expandafter\string\csname \scr@dsc@current\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\gdef\csname scr@\scr@dsc@current @afterindent\endcsname
+ ##1##2##3{##3}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+}
+%</book|report>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dsc@style@chapter@neededoptionstest
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@dsc@style@part@neededoptionstest}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/24}{added}
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/04/25}{initial values for all but level \texttt{part}}
+% \changes{v3.28}{2019/11/18}{\cs{ifstr} renamed to \cs{Ifstr}}
+% This macro checks, that all attributes needed for the definition of a
+% part command (with style \texttt{part}) are properly setup. If not, an
+% error is reported and the definition is prevented (using
+% \cs{aftergroup}\cs{@gobbletwo} inside \cs{scr@declaresectioncommanderror}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@dsc@style@part@neededoptionstest}{%
+%<*book|report>
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{\scr@dsc@current pagestyle}{%
+ \Ifstr{\scr@dsc@current}{part}{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommanderror{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {initial page style}{pagestyle}%
+ }{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommandwarning{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {initial page style}{pagestyle}%
+ {\partpagestyle}%
+ {\@namedef{\scr@dsc@current pagestyle}{\partpagestyle}}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@\scr@dsc@current @innerskip}{%
+ \Ifstr{\scr@dsc@current}{part}{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommanderror{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {inner part skip}{innerskip}%
+ }{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommandwarning{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {inner part skip}{innerskip}%
+ {\scr@part@innerskip}%
+ {\@namedef{scr@\scr@dsc@current @innerskip}{\scr@part@innerskip}}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+%</book|report>
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@\scr@dsc@current @beforeskip}{%
+ \Ifstr{\scr@dsc@current}{part}{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommanderror{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {before part skip}{beforeskip}%
+ }{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommandwarning{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {before part skip}{beforeskip}%
+ {\scr@part@beforeskip}%
+ {\@namedef{scr@\scr@dsc@current @beforeskip}{\scr@part@beforeskip}}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@\scr@dsc@current @afterskip}{%
+ \Ifstr{\scr@dsc@current}{part}{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommanderror{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {after part skip}{afterskip}%
+ }{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommandwarning{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {after part skip}{afterskip}%
+ {\scr@part@afterskip}%
+ {\@namedef{scr@\scr@dsc@current @afterskip}{\scr@part@afterskip}}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \IfExistskomafont{\scr@dsc@current}{}{%
+ \Ifstr{\scr@dsc@current}{part}{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommanderror{\scr@dsc@current}{font}{font}%
+ }{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommandwarning{\scr@dsc@current}{font}{font}%
+ {\usekomafont{part}}%
+ {\newkomafont{\scr@dsc@current}{\usekomafont{part}}}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \IfExistskomafont{\scr@dsc@current prefix}{}{%
+ \Ifstr{\scr@dsc@current}{part}{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommanderror{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {number font}{prefixfont}%
+ }{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommandwarning{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ {number font}{prefixfont}%
+ {\usekomafont{partprefix}}%
+ {\newkomafont{\scr@dsc@current prefix}{\usekomafont{partprefix}}}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@\scr@dsc@current @afterindent}{%
+ \l@addto@macro\local@endgroup{%
+ \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ using compatibility default
+%<article> `afterindent=false'\MessageBreak
+%<book|report> `afterindent=true'\MessageBreak
+ for `\expandafter\string\csname \scr@dsc@current\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\gdef\csname scr@\scr@dsc@current @afterindent\endcsname
+ ##1##2##3%
+%<article> {##2}%
+%<book|report> {##1}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dsc@style@part@neededoptionstest
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@dsc@parametersonlytrue,\scr@dsc@parametersonlyfalse,
+% \ifscr@dsc@parametersonly}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/24}{added}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{dummy options removed}
+% In the first option pass of \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} this is set to true,
+% if the \opt{style} option is used without value, to change the settings of a
+% command without running \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@\meta{style}@command} and
+% therefore without defining the command itself.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Is this a not documented feature? What's the sense?
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifscr@dsc@parametersonly
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \ifscr@dsc@parametersonly
+%
+% \begin{command}{\DeclareSectionCommand}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/21}{added}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{re-implemented because of style depending
+% options}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{\cs{scr@dsc@def@style@\dots @command}
+% defines style depending macros}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/03}{using \cs{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}}
+% The main command to define new section commands or redefine existing section
+% commands. Incidentally it also defines the corresponding ToC entry command.
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}\oarg{options}\marg{command name}
+% \end{quote}
+% is used to define \cs{\meta{command name}}. The \meta{options} are used to
+% specify the behave of the command. It is declared as optional
+% argument. However for new commands not all the options are really optional.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] Don't forget to declare all options, that are defined for
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} also for \cs{ProvideSectionCommands}!
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\DeclareSectionCommand}[2][]{%
+ \edef\scr@dsc@current{#2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The first pass to get the:
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{style=\meta{name}}:]
+% style of the section command.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \scr@dsc@parametersonlyfalse
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{style}{%
+ \IfArgIsEmpty{##1}{%
+ \scr@dsc@parametersonlytrue
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@dsc@def@style@##1@command}{%
+ \FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue
+ }{%
+ \@namedef{scr@\scr@dsc@current @style}{##1}%
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{tocstyle=\meta{name}}:] \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{early
+% evaluation of option \opt{tocstyle}} \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/02}{prefix
+% for storing directory style changed} style of the ToC entry. From
+% \pkg*{tocbasic} 3.27 the style name macro has been changed from
+% \cs{scr@dte@\meta{level name}@style} to \cs{scr@tso@\meta{level
+% name}@style}.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Don't support deprecated \cs{scr@dte@\meta{level name}@style}
+% any longer.
+% \end{description}
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{tocstyle}{%
+ \IfArgIsEmpty{##1}{%
+ \@ifundefined{scr@dte@\scr@dsc@current @style}{}{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname scr@dte@\scr@dsc@current @style\endcsname
+ \relax
+ }%
+ \expandafter\let\csname scr@tso@\scr@dsc@current @style\endcsname
+ \relax
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }{%
+%<trace> \typeout{TRACE: option tocstyle=##1}%
+%<trace> \typeout{TRACE: command=\scr@dsc@current}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@dte@def@l@##1}{%
+%<trace> \typeout{TRACE: style not defined}%
+ \FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue
+ }{%
+%<trace> \typeout{TRACE: style defined}%
+ \@namedef{scr@dte@\scr@dsc@current @style}{##1}%
+ \@namedef{scr@tso@\scr@dsc@current @style}{##1}%
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\texttt{@else@=\meta{value}}:]
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{early evaluation of option \opt{tocstyle}}
+% All other options are ignored using the \opt{@else@} option, which simply
+% accepts every option. So the first pass does not report any unknown
+% options.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{@else@}{%
+%<*trace>
+ \typeout{TRACE: ignoring option `@else@=\detokenize{##1}'}%
+ \typeout{TRACE:
+ \string\scr@key@atlist=`\detokenize\expandafter{\scr@key@atlist}'}%
+ \typeout{TRACE:
+ \string\scr@key@name=`\detokenize\expandafter{\scr@key@name}'}%
+ \typeout{TRACE:
+ \string\scr@key@value=`\detokenize\expandafter{\scr@key@value}'}%
+%</trace>
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+ \FamilyExecuteOptions[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{Resetting options after first pass}
+% After the first pass we have to reset these options.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \RelaxFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{@else@}%
+ \RelaxFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{tocstyle}%
+ \RelaxFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{style}%
+ \begingroup
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@\scr@dsc@current @style}{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommanderror{\scr@dsc@current}
+ {section command style}{style}%
+ }{}%
+ \endgroup
+ \@firstofone{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{dummy options for main pass removed}
+% Now, we know the style and can activate all the options of the style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<trace> \typeout{TRACE: style=\@nameuse{scr@\scr@dsc@current @style}}%
+ \@nameuse{scr@dsc@style@\@nameuse{scr@\scr@dsc@current @style}@options}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% And initialize the ToC style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<trace> \typeout{TRACE: tocstyle=%
+%<trace> \@nameuse{scr@tso@\scr@dsc@current @style}}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@tso@\scr@dsc@current @style}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{l@\scr@dsc@current}{%
+ \@namedef{scr@tso@\scr@dsc@current @style}{default}%
+ }{}%
+ }{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{support for prefix \opt{tocentry} instead of
+% \opt{toc}}
+% We also have to define options for all the ToC style options by adding the
+% prefix \opt{toc} to the names of these options. This also means a ToC style
+% option \opt{style} must not exist (because we already have an option
+% \opt{tocstyle}). This is the main reason, \cs{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} has not
+% such an option but a corresponding argument. Additionally ToC style options
+% should never start with \opt{toc} (because of the ugly resulting
+% \opt{toctoc\dots}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\scr@dsc@tocstyle@options\@empty
+ \let\scr@dsc@extra@relax@opts\@empty
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@tso@\scr@dsc@current @style}{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname scr@tso@\scr@dsc@current @style\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname scr@dte@\scr@dsc@current @style\endcsname
+ }{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@tso@\scr@dsc@current @style}{}{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\scr@dte@current{#2}%
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\@ExecuteTOCEntryStyleInitCode{%
+ \@nameuse{scr@tso@\scr@dsc@current @style}%
+ }{\scr@dsc@current}%
+ }\reserved@a
+ \def\do@endgroup{\endgroup}%
+ \def\do##1{%
+ \l@addto@macro\do@endgroup{%
+ \l@addto@macro\scr@dsc@extra@relax@opts{%
+ \RelaxFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{toc##1}%
+ \RelaxFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{tocentry##1}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \kernel@ifnextchar[%]
+ {\@dodefault{##1}}%
+ {\@donodefault{##1}}%
+ }%
+ \def\@donodefault##1{%
+ \l@addto@macro\do@endgroup{%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{toc##1}{%
+ \l@addto@macro{\scr@dsc@tocstyle@options}{##1={####1},}%
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{tocentry##1}{%
+ \l@addto@macro{\scr@dsc@tocstyle@options}{##1={####1},}%
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \def\@dodefault##1[##2]{%
+ \l@addto@macro\do@endgroup{%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{toc##1}[##2]{%
+ \l@addto@macro{\scr@dsc@tocstyle@options}{##1={####1},}%
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{tocentry##1}[##2]{%
+ \l@addto@macro{\scr@dsc@tocstyle@options}{##1={####1},}%
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \scr@dte@doopts
+ \do@endgroup
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Make option \opt{style} and \opt{tocstyle} (fast) dummies, because they
+% already have been handled completely.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{style}{\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{tocstyle}{\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Some options exist for all section command styles and therefore are defined
+% here and not a part of the style options:
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{expandtopt=\meta{boolean}}:]
+% If \texttt{true} all lengths are expanded at setting time to unit pt
+% instead of used unchanged. With this, the lengths are not depending on the
+% font size of usage time but on the current font size.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \FamilyBoolKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{expandtopt}{scr@dsc@expandtopt}%
+ \scr@dsc@expandtoptfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{increaselevel=\meta{number}}:]
+% Automatically increase \opt{level} by \meta{number} (with default 1). This
+% is needed for \cs{DeclareSectionCommands} and therefore only defined if
+% \cs{scr@local@levelincrease} is defined.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@local@levelincrease}{%
+ \RelaxFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{increaselevel}%
+ }{%
+ \FamilyCounterMacroKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{increaselevel}[1]%
+ {\scr@local@levelincrease}%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{level=\meta{number}}:]
+% The numerical outline level of the command.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@local@leveloffset}{%
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\FamilyCounterMacroKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{level}{%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname \scr@dsc@current numdepth\endcsname}%
+ }\reserved@a
+ }{%
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\DefineFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{level}{%
+ \noexpand\FamilySetCounterMacro{KOMAarg}{level}{%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname \scr@dsc@current numdepth\endcsname
+ }%
+ \unexpanded{%
+ {\numexpr ##1+\scr@local@leveloffset\relax}%
+ \edef\scr@local@leveloffset{%
+ \the\numexpr\scr@local@leveloffset+\scr@local@levelincrease\relax
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }\reserved@a
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{counterwithout=\meta{name}}:]
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/09/09}{option \opt{counterwithout}}
+% The counter of this command should not depend on the counter
+% \cnt{name} any longer.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \FamilyStringKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{counterwithout}{\scr@local@counterwithout}%
+ \let\scr@local@counterwithout\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{counterwithin=\meta{name}}:]
+% The counter of this command depends on the counter \cnt{name}.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \FamilyStringKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{counterwithin}{\scr@local@counterwithin}%
+ \let\scr@local@counterwithin\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{toclevel=\meta{number}}:]
+% The numerical ToC entry level. Default is \opt{level}. This option exists
+% only, if the ToC style supports it. But because with
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommands} we need an offset for this (similar to the
+% increase of \opt{level}). So we have to redefine it in case of existing
+% \cs{scr@local@tocleveloffset}.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@local@tocleveloffset}{}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{KV@KOMAarg.dsc@toclevel}{%
+ }{%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{toclevel}{%
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\l@addto@macro{\noexpand\scr@dsc@tocstyle@options}{%
+ level=\the\numexpr ##1+\scr@local@tocleveloffset\relax,%
+ }%
+ }\reserved@a
+ \edef\scr@local@tocleveloffset{%
+ \the\numexpr\scr@local@tocleveloffset+\scr@local@levelincrease\relax
+ }%
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{only temporary definition of options}
+% The main pass of options execution. Afterwards reset all the options.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \FamilyExecuteOptions[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{#1}%
+ \scr@dsc@extra@relax@opts
+ \let\scr@dsc@extra@relax@opts\relax
+ \RelaxSectionCommandOptions
+ \RelaxFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{style}%
+ \RelaxFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{tocstyle}%
+ \RelaxFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{expandtopt}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@local@levelincrease}{}{%
+ \RelaxFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{increaselevel}%
+ }%
+ \RelaxFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{level}%
+ \RelaxFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{counterwithin}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now, we can test, if all needed options has been defined.
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/07}{\opt{level} must no be -\cs{maxdimen}}
+% Also test, that \opt{level} is not -\len{maxdimen}, because this value is
+% used internally to switch of numbering locally.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \def\local@endgroup{\endgroup}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{\scr@dsc@current numdepth}{%
+ \scr@declaresectioncommanderror{\scr@dsc@current}{section level}{level}%
+ }{%
+ \expandafter\ifnum \csname #2numdepth\endcsname>-\maxdimen
+ \@nameuse{scr@dsc@style@%
+ \@nameuse{scr@\scr@dsc@current @style}%
+ @neededoptionstest}%
+ \else
+ \ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ `level' must be > -\the\numexpr\maxdimen\relax
+ }{%
+ KOMA-Script internally sets `secnumdepth' to
+ -\the\numexpr\maxdimen\relax\space
+ to locally switch of\MessageBreak
+ the numbering, i.e., inside running heads.\MessageBreak
+ Because of this, you can define section commands with\MessageBreak
+ `level' greater than -\the\numexpr\maxdimen\relax\space only.%
+ }%
+ \let\local@endgroup\endgroup
+ \aftergroup\@gobbletwo
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \local@endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the configuration is compete, we are ready for the (re-)definition of the
+% command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@firstofone{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/15}{missing \cs{expandafter} added}
+% First of all we need a counter:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\newcounter{#2}}{}%
+ \ifx\scr@local@counterwithout\relax
+ \else\ifx\scr@local@counterwithout\@empty
+ \else
+ \@removefromreset{#2}{\scr@local@counterwithout}%
+ \fi
+ \@namedef{the#2}{\arabic{#2}}%
+ \fi
+ \ifx\scr@local@counterwithin\relax
+ \else\ifx\scr@local@counterwithin\@empty
+ \@namedef{the#2}{\arabic{#2}}%
+ \else
+ \@removefromreset{#2}{\scr@local@counterwithin}%
+ \@addtoreset{#2}{\scr@local@counterwithin}%
+ \expandafter\def\csname the#2\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter{%
+ \csname the\scr@local@counterwithin\endcsname.\arabic{#2}}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \@ifundefined{#2format}{%
+ \@namedef{#2format}{\csname the#2\endcsname\autodot\enskip}%
+ }{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then the command itself (but only, if the \opt{style} was not empty):
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifscr@dsc@parametersonly
+ \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ not defining `\expandafter\string\csname #2\endcsname' due
+ to\MessageBreak
+ empty section style option%
+ }%
+ \else
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{%
+ scr@dsc@def@style@\@nameuse{scr@#2@style}@command%
+ }{%
+ \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ not defining `\expandafter\string\csname #2\endcsname'
+ due\MessageBreak
+ to not yet defined section style\MessageBreak
+ `\@nameuse{scr@#2@style}'%
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \@nameuse{scr@dsc@def@style@\@nameuse{scr@#2@style}@command}{#2}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We also need commands for the running head and a corresponding number
+% formatting. With \pkg*{scrlayer} this can and should be done using
+% \cs{DeclareSectionNumberDepth}. Otherwise we do it step by step.
+% \changes{v3.15a}{2015/01/21}{\cs{endskip} instead of \cs{enskip}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{DeclareSectionNumberDepth}{%
+ \@ifundefined{#2markformat}{%
+ \@namedef{#2markformat}{\csname the#2\endcsname\autodot\enskip}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifundefined{#2mark}{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname #2mark\endcsname\@gobble
+ }{}%
+ }{%
+ \DeclareSectionNumberDepth{#2}{\csname #2numdepth\endcsname}%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We also need macros to generate and print the ToC entry.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\providecommand\expandafter*%
+ \csname add#2tocentry\endcsname[2]{%
+ \addtocentrydefault{#2}{##1}{##2}%
+ }%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@tso@#2@style}{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname scr@tso@#2@style\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname scr@dte@#2@style\endcsname
+ }{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@tso@#2@style}{%
+ }{%
+ \DeclareTOCStyleEntry[\scr@dsc@tocstyle@options]{%
+ \@nameuse{scr@tso@#2@style}%
+ }{#2}%
+ }%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{l@#2}{%
+ \DeclareTOCStyleEntry[\scr@dsc@tocstyle@options]{default}{#2}%
+ }{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/0/07}{support for ToC levels with \pkg{hyperref}}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/06/27}{overwrite ToC levels of \pkg{hyperref}}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/06/27}{fallback handling of gaps in the bookmark
+% levels}
+% And we need extra code for \pkg{hyperref} and the bookmarks.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@atdocument
+ \let\reserved@a\@firstofone
+ \else
+ \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%
+ \let\reserved@a\@firstofone
+ }{%
+ \def\reserved@a##1{%
+ \AfterAtEndOfPackage{hyperref}{\AtBeginDocument{##1}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \reserved@a{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname toclevel@#2\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname #2tocdepth\endcsname
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{bookmarksetup}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@min@toclevel}{%
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\scr@min@toclevel
+ \csname toclevel@#2\endcsname
+ }{%
+ \expandafter\ifnum \csname toclevel@#2\endcsname
+ < \numexpr \scr@min@toclevel-1\relax
+ \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ Trying emergency fix for bookmark level gap,\MessageBreak
+ because toclevel of `#2'
+ (\csname toclevel@#2\endcsname)\MessageBreak
+ is more than 1 lower than currently lowest\MessageBreak
+ known level (\scr@min@toclevel).\MessageBreak
+ Note: This fix can fail and you should load\MessageBreak
+ package `bookmark' to avoid usage of this\MessageBreak
+ fix%
+ }%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname toclevel@#2\endcsname{%
+ \the\numexpr \scr@min@toclevel-1\relax
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\ifnum \csname toclevel@#2\endcsname
+ < \scr@min@toclevel\relax
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\scr@min@toclevel
+ \csname toclevel@#2\endcsname
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@max@toclevel}{%
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\scr@max@toclevel
+ \csname toclevel@#2\endcsname
+ }{%
+ \expandafter\ifnum \csname toclevel@#2\endcsname
+ > \numexpr \scr@max@toclevel+1\relax
+ \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ Trying emergency fix for bookmark level gap,\MessageBreak
+ because toclevel of `#2'
+ (\csname toclevel@#2\endcsname)\MessageBreak
+ is more than 1 greater than currently highest\MessageBreak
+ known level (\scr@max@toclevel).\MessageBreak
+ Note: This fix can fail and you should load\MessageBreak
+ package `bookmark' to avoid usage of this\MessageBreak
+ fix%
+ }%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname toclevel@#2\endcsname{%
+ \the\numexpr \scr@max@toclevel+1\relax
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\ifnum \csname toclevel@#2\endcsname
+ > \scr@max@toclevel\relax
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\scr@max@toclevel
+ \csname toclevel@#2\endcsname
+ \fi
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \let\scr@dsc@current\relax
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@declaresectioncommanderror}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/21}{added}
+% It there were not enough options to \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} to define the
+% command, we report an error and also execute
+% \cs{aftergroup}\cs{@gobbletwo}. So the |\@firstofone{…}| code after
+% |\endgroup| resp. |\local@endgroup| inside \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} that
+% defines the new section command etc. will never be used in such a case.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@declaresectioncommanderror}[3]{%
+ \ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ #2 of \expandafter\string\csname #1\endcsname\space unknown%
+ }{%
+ Please use option `#3' to declare the #2.\MessageBreak
+ If you'll continue, declaration will be ignored%
+ }%
+ \let\local@endgroup\endgroup
+ \aftergroup\@gobbletwo
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@declaresectioncommanderror
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@declaresectioncommandwarning}
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/04/25}{added}
+% Sometimes a warning and extension of \cs{local@endgroup} is enough.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@declaresectioncommandwarning}[5]{%
+ \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ #2 of \expandafter\string\csname #1\endcsname\space unknown.\MessageBreak
+ You should use option `#3' if you\MessageBreak
+ do not want to use the default value\MessageBreak
+ `\detokenize{#4}'%
+ }%
+ \l@addto@macro\local@endgroup{#5}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@declaresectioncommandwarning
+% \end{command}^^A \DeclareSectionCommand
+%
+%
+% \begin{command}{\DeclareNewSectionCommand}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/21}{added}
+% \changes{v3.25}{2018/03/10}{additional tests and errors about
+% \cs{the\dots}, \cs{\dots mark}, \cs{\dots format},
+% \cs{\dots markformat}}
+% \changes{v3.30}{2020/04/08}{orphan spaces removed}
+% This is similar to \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} but reports an error, if the
+% command or a main helper already exist. So it can be used for new commands
+% only.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\DeclareNewSectionCommand}[2][]{%
+ \@ifundefined{#2}{%
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \let\reserved@b\@empty
+ \@for \reserved@a:=the#2,#2mark,#2format,#2markformat\do{%
+ \expandafter\scr@ifundefinedorrelax\expandafter{\reserved@a}{}{%
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \edef\reserved@b{\expandafter\string\csname \reserved@a\endcsname}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \if@tempswa
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.30}{2020/04/08}{extended test for really new}
+% After the general user commands, we just have to detect the style \dots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\scr@dsc@current
+ \csname scr@tso@##2@style\endcsname
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{style}{%
+ \edef\scr@dsc@current{##1}%
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{@else@}{\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}%
+ \FamilyExecuteOptions[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{#1}%
+ \RelaxFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{@else@}%
+ \RelaxFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{style}%
+ \@tempswatrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \dots{} to gut through the \cs{scr@dsc@style@\meta{style}@subcommands} and
+% test, if one of them exists.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{scr@dsc@current}{}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@dsc@style@\scr@dsc@current @subcommands}{%
+ }{%
+ \edef\reserved@b{%
+ \csname scr@dsc@style@\scr@dsc@current @subcommands\endcsname{#2}%
+ }%
+ \expandafter\@for\expandafter\reserved@a\expandafter:\expandafter=%
+ \reserved@b\do{%
+ \expandafter\scr@ifundefinedorrelax\expandafter{\reserved@a}{}{%
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \edef\reserved@b{%
+ \expandafter\string\csname \reserved@a\endcsname}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }
+ }%
+ \let\scr@dsc@current\relax
+ \fi
+ \if@tempswa
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If not, we can use \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}. Otherwise just report an
+% error.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \DeclareSectionCommand[{#1}]{#2}%
+ \else
+ \ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ command `\reserved@b' already defined%
+ }{%
+ You've tried to define the section command `\expandafter\string\csname
+ #2\endcsname' newly.\MessageBreak
+ Such a section command needs an additional new command
+ `\reserved@b',\MessageBreak
+ but this already exists. So you cannot define
+ `\expandafter\string\csname #2\endcsname' newly.\MessageBreak
+ Maybe you should use one of \string\DeclareSectionCommand,
+ \string\RedeclareSectionCommand,\MessageBreak
+ or \string\ProvideSectionCommand.\MessageBreak
+ If you'll continue, the command will be ignored.%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ }{%
+ \ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ command `\expandafter\string\csname #2\endcsname' already defined%
+ }{%
+ You've tried to define the section command `\expandafter\string\csname
+ #2\endcsname' newly,\MessageBreak
+ but a command or something else with this name already
+ exists.\MessageBreak
+ Maybe you should use one of \string\DeclareSectionCommand,
+ \string\RedeclareSectionCommand,\MessageBreak
+ or \string\ProvideSectionCommand.\MessageBreak
+ If you'll continue, the command will be ignored.%
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \DeclareNewSectionCommand
+%
+% \begin{command}{\RedeclareSectionCommand}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/21}{added}
+% This is much easier than \cs{DeclareNewSectionCommand} because it tests only
+% for the main command and uses \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} if the main command
+% already exists. So all the additional commands and main helpers do not need
+% to exist.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\RedeclareSectionCommand}[2][]{%
+ \@ifundefined{#2}{%
+ \ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ command `\expandafter\string\csname #2\endcsname' not defined%
+ }{%
+ You've tried to re-define the section command `\expandafter\string\csname
+ #2\endcsname',\MessageBreak
+ but a command with this name does not exists.\MessageBreak
+ Maybe you should use one of \string\DeclareSectionCommand,
+ \string\DeclareNewSectionCommand,\MessageBreak
+ or \string\ProvideSectionCommand.\MessageBreak
+ If you'll continue, the command will be irgnored.%
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \DeclareSectionCommand[{#1}]{#2}%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \RedeclareSectionCommand
+%
+% \begin{command}{\ProvideSectionCommand}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/21}{added}
+% This is much easier than \cs{DeclareNewSectionCommand} because currently it
+% tests only for the command itself but nor for the helpers.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] This is dangerous, because
+% e.g. |\ProvideSectionCommand{schapter}| would break \cs{chapter} (because
+% of \cs{@schapter}). So maybe it should do the same tests as
+% \cs{DeclareNewSectionCommand} and at least warn.
+% \end{description}
+% Basierend auf |\DeclareSectionCommand| wird eine Gliederungsanweisung
+% definiert, wenn sie zuvor noch nicht existierte. Wichtig zu bemerken ist,
+% dass die ganzen Hilfsanweisungen bereits existieren dürfen.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\ProvideSectionCommand}[2][]{%
+ \@ifundefined{#2}{%
+ \DeclareSectionCommand[{#1}]{#2}%
+ }{%
+ \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ \string\ProvideSectionCommand{#1} ignored%
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \ProvideSectionCommand
+%
+% \begin{command}{\DeclareSectionCommands}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{added}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{using \cs{scr@trim@spaces}}
+% Based on \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} this one can be used to define several
+% commands at once. The commands are given as a comma-separated list of
+% commands. There is one additional option \opt{increaselevel=\meta{number}}
+% to add \meta{number} to the \opt{level} at each call of
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} but the first one. The definition of this option
+% is done inside \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} if \cs{scr@local@levelincrease} is
+% defined. Because of the first run, we initialize it with 0. The same has to
+% be done for \cs{scr@local@leveloffset} and \cs{scr@local@tocleveloffset}.
+% At the end we also have to un-define these local commands. Otherwise later
+% usage of \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} would be detected as part of
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommands}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\DeclareSectionCommands}[2][]{%
+ \edef\reserved@a{#2}%
+ \def\scr@local@levelincrease{\z@}%
+ \def\scr@local@leveloffset{\z@}%
+ \def\scr@local@tocleveloffset{\z@}%
+ \@for\reserved@a:=\reserved@a\do{%
+ \scr@trim@spaces\reserved@a
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \unexpanded{\DeclareSectionCommand[{#1}]}{\reserved@a}%
+ }%
+ \reserved@a
+ }%
+ \let\scr@local@levelincrease\relax
+ \let\scr@local@leveloffset\relax
+ \let\scr@local@tocleveloffset\relax
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \DeclareSectionCommands
+%
+% \begin{command}{\DeclareNewSectionCommands}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{added}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{using \cs{scr@trim@spaces}}
+% Because of \opt{increaselevel} we cannot simply use
+% \cs{DeclareNewSectionCommand} inside, but have to use
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} even for already defined commands (but
+% nevertheless report an error).
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Is this really the correct error action? Does it really matter,
+% if \opt{increaselevel} would be wrong after already reporting an error?
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\DeclareNewSectionCommands}[2][]{%
+ \edef\reserved@a{#2}%
+ \def\scr@local@levelincrease{\z@}%
+ \def\scr@local@leveloffset{\z@}%
+ \def\scr@local@tocleveloffset{\z@}%
+ \@for\reserved@a:=\reserved@a\do{%
+ \scr@trim@spaces\reserved@a
+ \@ifundefined{\reserved@a}{}{%
+ \ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ command `\expandafter\string\csname\reserved@a\endcsname' already
+ defined%
+ }{%
+ You've tried to define the section command
+ `\expandafter\string\csname\reserved@a\endcsname' newly,\MessageBreak
+ but a command, token, box or length with this name already
+ exists.\MessageBreak
+ Maybe you should use one of \string\DeclareSectionCommand,
+ \string\RedeclareSectionCommand,\MessageBreak
+ or \string\ProvideSectionCommand.\MessageBreak
+ Nevertheless, if you'll continue, the command will be defined.%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \unexpanded{\DeclareSectionCommand[{#1}]}{\reserved@a}%
+ }%
+ \reserved@a
+ }%
+ \let\scr@local@levelincrease\relax
+ \let\scr@local@leveloffset\relax
+ \let\scr@local@tocleveloffset\relax
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \DeclareNewSectionCommands
+%
+% \begin{command}{\RedeclareSectionCommands}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{added}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{using \cs{scr@trim@spaces}}
+% Because of \opt{increaselevel} we cannot simply use
+% \cs{RedeclareSectionCommand} inside, but have to use
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} even for not yet defined commands (but
+% nevertheless report an error).
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Is this really the correct error action? Does it really matter,
+% if \opt{increaselevel} would be wrong after already reporting an error?
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\RedeclareSectionCommands}[2][]{%
+ \edef\reserved@a{#2}%
+ \def\scr@local@levelincrease{\z@}%
+ \def\scr@local@leveloffset{\z@}%
+ \def\scr@local@tocleveloffset{\z@}%
+ \@for\reserved@a:=\reserved@a\do{%
+ \scr@trim@spaces\reserved@a
+ \@ifundefined{\reserved@a}{%
+ \ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ command `\expandafter\string\csname\reserved@a\endcsname' not defined%
+ }{%
+ You've tried to re-define the section command
+ `\expandafter\string\csname\reserved@a\endcsname',\MessageBreak
+ but a command with this name does not exists.\MessageBreak
+ Maybe you should use one of \string\DeclareSectionCommand,
+ \string\DeclareNewSectionCommand,\MessageBreak
+ or \string\ProvideSectionCommand.\MessageBreak
+ Nevertheless, if you'll continue, the command will be defined.%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \unexpanded{\DeclareSectionCommand[{#1}]}{\reserved@a}%
+ }%
+ \reserved@a
+ }%
+ \let\scr@local@levelincrease\relax
+ \let\scr@local@leveloffset\relax
+ \let\scr@local@tocleveloffset\relax
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \RedeclareSectionCommands
+%
+% \begin{command}{\ProvideSectionCommands}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{added}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{re-implemented because of style depending
+% options}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{using \cs{scr@trim@spaces}}
+% This is the real problematic case, because \opt{increaselevel} should be
+% used even for commands, that must not be defined. However, maybe a solution
+% like this should be used for the two previous commands too.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\ProvideSectionCommands}[2][]{%
+ \edef\reserved@a{#2}%
+ \def\scr@local@levelincrease{\z@}%
+ \def\scr@local@leveloffset{\z@}%
+ \def\scr@local@tocleveloffset{\z@}%
+ \@for\reserved@a:=\reserved@a\do{%
+ \scr@trim@spaces\reserved@a
+ \@ifundefined{\reserved@a}{%
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \unexpanded{\DeclareSectionCommand[{#1}]}{\reserved@a}%
+ }%
+ \reserved@a
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the command already exists, process options \opt{level}, \opt{toclevel}
+% and \opt{increaselevel} and ignore all others using an \opt{@else@} option.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{@else@}{\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}%
+ \FamilyCounterMacroKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{increaselevel}[1]%
+ {\scr@local@levelincrease}%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{level}{%
+ \FamilySetCounterMacro{KOMAarg}{level}{\reserved@b}{##1}%
+ \edef\scr@local@leveloffset{%
+ \the\numexpr\scr@local@leveloffset+\scr@local@levelincrease\relax
+ }%
+ }%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{toclevel}{%
+ \FamilySetCounterMacro{KOMAarg}{toclevel}{\reserved@b}{##1}%
+ \edef\scr@local@tocleveloffset{%
+ \the\numexpr\scr@local@tocleveloffset+\scr@local@levelincrease\relax
+ }%
+ }%
+ \FamilyExecuteOptions[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{#1}%
+ \RelaxFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{toclevel}%
+ \RelaxFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{level}%
+ \RelaxFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{increaselevel}%
+ \RelaxFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{@else@}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \let\scr@local@levelincrease\relax
+ \let\scr@local@leveloffset\relax
+ \let\scr@local@tocleveloffset\relax
+}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \ProvideSectionCommands
+%
+% \begin{command}{\IfSectionCommandStyleIs}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/04}{added}
+% Test whether ot not the section command of argument 1 has the style of
+% argument 2. If so: use argument 3, of not: use argument 4.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\IfSectionCommandStyleIs}[2]{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{#1}{%
+ \ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ \expandafter\string\csname #1\endcsname\space not defined}{%
+ You cannot compare the section command style of an undefined command.}%
+ }{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@#1@style}{%
+ \ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ \expandafter\string\csname #1\endcsname\space not a valid section
+ command%
+ }{%
+ You cannot detect the section command style of a command, that
+ has\MessageBreak
+ never been defined as a section command by KOMA-Script.%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@dsc@def@style@#2@command}{%
+ \ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ unknown section command style `#2'%
+ }{}%
+ }%
+ \Ifstr{\@nameuse{scr@#1@style}}{#2}%
+}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}
+%
+% \begin{option}{bookmarkpackage}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/06/27}{added}
+% Package \pkg{hyperref} has problems with bookmark level gaps. So if
+% either the users omits a heading level or defines a heading with a level
+% that distinguish more than one from the previous or following level, there
+% would be a problem. One recommended solution for this would be to use
+% package \pkg{bookmark}. So if we load this package, we can use the same
+% value for bookmark levels and TOC levels even within
+% \cls*{scrartcl}. Nevertheless we allow the user to decide not to use
+% \pkg{bookmark}, but then it is not my fault, if something strange
+% happens.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*option>
+\KOMA@ifkey{bookmarkpackage}{@scr@autoloadbookmarkpackage}
+\@scr@autoloadbookmarkpackagetrue
+\KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{bookmarkpackage}{true}
+\AfterAtEndOfPackage{hyperref}{%
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{bookmark}{}{%
+ \if@scr@autoloadbookmarkpackage
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/06/26}{try to translate \pkg{hyperref} driver to
+% \pkg{bookmark} driver option}
+% The name of the \pkg{hyperref} driver is in \cs{Hy@driver}. But
+% \pkg{bookmark} does not provide the same drivers, so we try to translate
+% the curreny known \pkg{hyperref} drivers to \pkg{bookmark}
+% drivers. Also we do not load \pkg{bookmark} with a driver option but
+% define \pkg{bookmark}'s \cs{BookmarkDriverDefault}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{Hy@driver}{%
+ \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ `hyperref' loaded but `\string\Hy@driver' undefined.\MessageBreak
+ This should not happen!\MessageBreak
+ Maybe `hyperref' not loaded or unknown version?%
+ }%
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.28}{2019/11/18}{\cs{ifstr} renamed to \cs{Ifstr}}
+% Note: \texttt{hpdftex}, \texttt{hluatex}, \texttt{hxetex} and \texttt{hvtex}
+% do not need to be translated, because they are autodetected by
+% \pkg{bookmark} as well. \texttt{hypertex}, \texttt{hdviwindo},
+% \texttt{htex4ht} and \texttt{latex2html} are not known by \pkg{bookmark},
+% so we stay with the default (usually \texttt{dvips}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \Ifstr{\Hy@driver}{hdvips}{%
+ \providecommand*{\BookmarkDriverDefault}{dvips}%
+ }{%
+ \Ifstr{\Hy@driver}{hdvipdfm}{%
+ \providecommand*{\BookmarkDriverDefault}{dvipdfm}%
+ }{%
+ \Ifstr{\Hy@driver}{hdvipson}{%
+ \providecommand*{\BookmarkDriverDefault}{dvipsone}%
+ }{%
+ \Ifstr{\Hy@driver}{htexture}{%
+ \providecommand*{\BookmarkDriverDefault}{textures}%
+ }{%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ loading recommended package `bookmark'.\MessageBreak
+ Using `bookmark' together with `hyperref' is
+ recommended,\MessageBreak
+ because of handling of possible bookmark level gaps.\MessageBreak
+ You can avoid loading `bookmark' with KOMA-Script
+ option\MessageBreak
+ `bookmarkpackage=false' before \string\begin{document}
+ and\MessageBreak
+ you can avoid this message adding:\MessageBreak
+ \space\space\string\usepackage
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{BookmarkDriverDefault}{}{%
+ [\BookmarkDriverDefault]%
+ }{bookmark}\MessageBreak
+ before \string\begin{document}%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.33}{2021/02/17}{workaround for catcode changes of
+% \pkg{babel-spanish}}
+% For \pkg{babel-spanish} we need to deactivate quoting before loading
+% \pkg{bookmark}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{es@quoting}{%
+ \RequirePackage{bookmark}%
+ }{%
+ \ifx\es@quoting\activatequoting
+ \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ temporary deactivation of babel-spanish quoting
+ }%
+ \deactivatequoting
+ \RequirePackage{bookmark}%
+ \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ reactivation of babel-spanish quoting
+ }%
+ \activatequoting
+ \else
+ \RequirePackage{bookmark}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.26b}{2019/01/17}{workaround for \cs{@beginmainauxhook} added}
+% Sometimes \pkg{auxhook} is not able to recognize that it cannot use a
+% patch of \cs{document} to execute \cs{@beginmainauxhook} if it is loaded via
+% \cs{AtBeginDocument}. In this case we do it here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\@beginmainauxhook\relax
+ \else
+ \if@filesw
+ \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ seems someone has broken package `auxhook'.\MessageBreak
+ Usually this happens, if `auxhook' is loaded or used\MessageBreak
+ implicitly or explicitly by patching
+ \string\document%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{AtEndPreamble}{}{%
+ \MessageBreak
+ or via etoolbox command \string\AtEndPreamble%
+ }.\MessageBreak
+ Trying an emergency workaround.\MessageBreak
+ You can avoid this warning adding:\MessageBreak
+ \space\space\string\usepackage{auxhook}\MessageBreak
+ before \string\begin{document}%
+ }%
+ \@beginmainauxhook
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+%</option>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{option}^^A bookmarkpackage
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Preambles of parts or chapters}
+%
+% The \KOMAScript{} classes \cls*{scrbook} and \cls*{scrreprt} provide
+% preambles above and below the headings of parts and chapters. The preamble
+% above is printed into the usual distance above the headings. It does not
+% increase this distance to avoid \emph{jumping headings}. However here we
+% have only the generic code for preambles. The user commands are defined by
+% \cs{scr@dsc@style@chapter@command} and \cs{scr@dsc@style@part@command}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\use@preamble}
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{added}
+% Used as a general macro to print the stored preamble code and clean the
+% storage. Preambles are only printed, if the storage is defined. But an empty
+% defined storage would be printed. The argument is the name of the storage,
+% e.g., \texttt{chapter@o}, \texttt{chapter@u}, \texttt{part@o},
+% \texttt{part@u}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*book|report>
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\use@preamble}[1]{%
+ \@ifundefined{#1@preamble}{}{%
+ \@nameuse{#1@preamble}%
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname#1@preamble\endcsname=\relax
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\set@preamble}
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{added}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}
+% Macro
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{set@preamble}\marg{level name}\oarg{position}\oarg{width}\marg{text}
+% \end{quote}
+% defines a preamble code stored into \cs{\meta{preamble name}@preamble}. The
+% \meta{preamble name} is build depending on the \meta{level name} and the
+% \meta{position}. The \meta{position} is a combination of vertical and
+% horizontal position and used to generate not only the \meta{preamble name}
+% but also options for the \cs{parbox} used to encapsulate the \meta{text}
+% into a preamble code. The \meta{width} is also used for the \cs{parbox}.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] The definition of a preamble is global and the definition of a
+% new preamble of the same \meta{preamble name} overwrite an existing one.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macro}{\set@@preamble}
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{added}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}
+% \begin{macro}{\set@@@preamble}
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{added}
+% \begin{macro}{\set@@@@preamble}
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{added}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/27}{missing brace added}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2012/10/16}{allow \texttt{o} as alias for \texttt{b}}
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/02/14}{\texttt{b} fixed}
+% We need a lot of helpers because of not using \pkg*{xparse} but having
+% several optional arguments. At least one optional argument? If not use an
+% empty default for the first one and \len{hsize} for the second one.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\set@preamble}[1]{%
+ \kernel@ifnextchar [%]
+ {\set@@preamble{#1}}{\set@@@preamble{#1}[][\hsize]}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Or even two optional argument? If not use default \len{hsize}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\set@@preamble}{}
+\def\set@@preamble#1[#2]{%
+ \kernel@ifnextchar [%]
+ {\set@@@preamble{#1}[{#2}]}{\set@@@preamble{#1}[{#2}][\hsize]}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% From here we know all optional arguments and have to process the composite
+% \meta{position}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\set@@@preamble}{}
+\long\def\set@@@preamble#1[#2][#3]#4{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\prmbl@pos{#2}\let\prmbl@hpos\relax\let\prmbl@vpos\relax
+ \expandafter \@tfor \expandafter \@tempa
+ \expandafter :\expandafter =\prmbl@pos
+ \do{%
+ \if \@tempa l%
+ \set@preamble@hpos{0}{#2}%
+ \fi%
+ \if \@tempa c%
+ \set@preamble@hpos{1}{#2}%
+ \fi%
+ \if \@tempa r%
+ \set@preamble@hpos{2}{#2}%
+ \fi%
+ \if \@tempa u%
+ \set@preamble@vpos{0}{#2}%
+ \fi%
+ \if \@tempa b%
+ \set@preamble@vpos{0}{#2}%
+ \fi
+ \if \@tempa o%
+ \set@preamble@vpos{1}{#2}%
+ \fi%
+ \if \@tempa t%
+ \set@preamble@vpos{1}{#2}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the horizontal or vertical position is still unclear use defaults.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{prmbl@hpos}{\def\prmbl@hpos{0}}{}%
+ \@ifundefined{prmbl@vpos}{\def\prmbl@vpos{0}}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% From the vertical position we can build the \meta{preamble name} and the
+% vertical position of the \cs{parbox} the horizontal is used for the
+% horizontal skip before and after the \cs{parbox}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifcase\prmbl@hpos
+ \ifcase\prmbl@vpos
+ \set@@@@preamble{#1@u}{t}{#3}{}{\hfil}{#4}%
+ \else
+ \set@@@@preamble{#1@o}{b}{#3}{}{\hfil}{#4}%
+ \fi
+ \or
+ \ifcase\prmbl@vpos
+ \set@@@@preamble{#1@u}{t}{#3}{\hfil}{\hfil}{#4}%
+ \else
+ \set@@@@preamble{#1@o}{b}{#3}{\hfil}{\hfil}{#4}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifcase\prmbl@vpos
+ \set@@@@preamble{#1@u}{t}{#3}{\hfil}{}{#4}%
+ \else
+ \set@@@@preamble{#1@o}{b}{#3}{\hfil}{}{#4}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Last but not least add the horizontal aligned \cs{parbox} to the preamble
+% storage.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\set@@@@preamble}[6]{%
+ \expandafter\gdef\csname #1@preamble\endcsname{%
+ \hbox to\hsize{#4\parbox[{#2}]{#3}{#6\par}#5\par}%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\set@preamble@hpos}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/09/25}{added}
+% Either store the horizontal preamble position if not yet defined or if
+% already defined but illegal report it as an error.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\set@preamble@hpos}[2]{%
+ \@ifundefined{prbml@hpos}{%
+ \def\prmbl@hpos{#1}%
+ }{%
+ \ifnum \prmbl@hpos=0\relax\else%
+ \ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ inconsistent hpos options%
+ }{%
+ You've said `#2' as position option. But you have
+ to\MessageBreak
+ use only one of `l', `r', or `c' not two of
+ these.\MessageBreak
+ If you'll continue only first hpos option will be
+ used%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \set@preamble@hpos
+% \begin{macro}{\set@preamble@vpos}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/09/25}{added}
+% Either store the vertical position if not yet defined or if already defined
+% but illegal report it as an error.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\set@preamble@vpos}[2]{%
+ \@ifundefined{prbml@vpos}{%
+ \def\prmbl@vpos{#1}%
+ }{%
+ \ifnum \prmbl@vpos=0\relax\else%
+ \ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ inconsistent vpos options%
+ }{%
+ You've said `#2' as position option. But you have
+ to\MessageBreak
+ use only one of `t', `o', `b', or `u' not two of
+ these.\MessageBreak
+ If you'll continue only first vpos option will be
+ used%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+%</body>
+%</book|report>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \set@preamble@vpos
+% \end{macro}^^A \set@@@@preamble
+% \end{macro}^^A \set@@@preamble
+% \end{macro}^^A \set@@preamble
+% \end{macro}^^A \set@preamble
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Deprecated code for the ToC}
+%
+% Before using \pkg*{tocbasic} we needed additional code for our extended
+% version of \cs{@dottedtocline}. However this has been removed in
+% \KOMAScript~v3.36.
+%
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] This should be moved to \file{scrkernel-listsof.dtx} or should
+% be removed.
+% \end{description}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bprot@dottedtocline}
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/30}{added}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/25}{deprecated}
+% \changes{v3.36}{2022/03/15}{removed}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Rough structuring of books}
+%
+% Some books have a kind of rough structuring into front matter, main matter
+% and back matter. This has consequences for the page numbering and the
+% numbering of headings and other elements.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mainmattertrue,\@mainmatterfalse,\if@mainmatter}
+% For the numbering of headings and other elements we only need to know
+% whether we are in the main matter or not, because chapters outside the main
+% matter do not provide a number. A boolean switch is best for this. By
+% default we already start with the main matter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*book>
+%<*body>
+\newif\if@mainmatter\@mainmattertrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \@mainmattertrue,\if@mainmatter
+%
+% \begin{command}{\frontmatter}
+% \changes{v2.4e}{1996/07/02}{support for \opt{open\quotechar=any}}
+% \changes{v2.5h}{1999/12/29}{support for \opt{twoside}}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/09/27}{\cs{cleardoublepage} replaced by
+% \cs{cleardoubleoddpage}}
+% Switching to the front matter always needs a new odd page, because we change
+% the page numbering to lowercase Roman numbers.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\frontmatter{%
+ \if@twoside\cleardoubleoddpage\else\clearpage\fi
+ \@mainmatterfalse\pagenumbering{roman}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \frontmatter
+% \begin{command}{\mainmatter}
+% \changes{v2.4e}{1996/07/02}{support for \opt{open\quotechar=any}}
+% \changes{v2.5h}{1999/12/29}{support for \opt{twoside}}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/09/27}{\cs{cleardoublepage} replaced by
+% \cs{cleardoubleoddpage}}
+% Switching back to main matter always needs a new odd page, because we change
+% the page numbering to Arabic numbers.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\mainmatter{%
+ \if@twoside\cleardoubleoddpage\else\clearpage\fi
+ \@mainmattertrue\pagenumbering{arabic}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \mainmatter
+% \begin{command}{\backmatter}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/09/27}{\cs{cleardoublepage} replaced by
+% \cs{cleardoubleoddpage}}
+% Only with \opt{open=right} we start a new odd page when starting the back
+% matter.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] This does not make any sense, because the page numbering is not
+% changed. And it seems to be even wrong for \opt{open=left}! So why does
+% \cls*{book} use this and why shall we do so too?
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\backmatter{%
+ \if@openright\cleardoubleoddpage\else\clearpage\fi\@mainmatterfalse
+}
+%</body>
+%</book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Appendix}
+%
+% The classes (except \cls*{scrlttr2}) does provide an appendix switch,
+% similar but not identical to the standard classes.
+%
+% \begin{command}{\appendix}
+% Activation of the appendix switch over to numbering of chapters
+% resp. sections with uppercase letters.
+% \changes{v2.2d}{1995/05/28}{\cls*{scrartcl} doesn't have a chapter
+% counter}
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{alternative section numbering in appendix}
+% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{new \cs{appendixmore}}
+% \changes{v2.8e}{2001/07/10}{\cs{@altsecnumformattrue} removed}
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/19}{initial \cs{par} added}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/07/04}{\cs{newcommand*} replaced by \cs{gdef}}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/07/04}{simplified usage of \cs{appendixmore}}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/12/05}{improved warning}
+% \changes{v3.28}{2019/11/18}{\cs{ifstr} renamed to \cs{Ifstr}}
+% \changes{v3.34}{2021/04/30}{\LaTeX{} hook added}
+% \begin{command}{\appendixmore}
+% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{added}
+% \cs{appendixmore} is deprecated with \LaTeX{} 2020/10/01 (or newer) but
+% still executed as a kind of hook.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*\appendix{%
+ \Ifstr{\@currenvir}{appendix}{%
+ \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ You are using
+ `\string\begin{appendix}...\string\end{appendix}'.\MessageBreak
+ You should note, that `\string\appendix' is a mostly
+ globally\MessageBreak
+ working command not an enviroment with only local\MessageBreak
+ effects. Therefore `\string\end{appendix}' will neither\MessageBreak
+ switch back to normal section numbering nor finish\MessageBreak
+ every other effect of `\string\begin{appendix}'.\MessageBreak
+ Nevertheless, some effects may end with\MessageBreak
+ `\string\end{appendix}' and the document may become\MessageBreak
+ inconsistent.\MessageBreak
+ Because of this, you should remove `\string\end{appendix}'\MessageBreak
+ and replace `\string\begin{appendix}' by command\MessageBreak
+ `\string\appendix'%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \par
+%<*article>
+ \setcounter{section}{0}%
+ \setcounter{subsection}{0}%
+ \gdef\thesection{\@Alph\c@section}%
+%</article>
+%<*report|book>
+ \setcounter{chapter}{0}%
+ \setcounter{section}{0}%
+ \gdef\@chapapp{\appendixname}%
+ \gdef\thechapter{\@Alph\c@chapter}%
+%</report|book>
+}
+\IfLTXAtLeastTF{2020/10/01}{%
+ \g@addto@macro{\appendix}{\UseOneTimeHook{\KOMAClassName/appendix}}%
+}{}
+\g@addto@macro{\appendix}{\csname appendixmore\endcsname}
+%</body>
+%<*prepare>
+\IfLTXAtLeastTF{2020/10/01}{\NewHook{\KOMAClassName/appendix}}{}
+%</prepare>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}
+% \end{command}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Parts}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@thepart}
+% \changes{v2.8e}{2001/07/10}{removed}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The definition of parts depends on the class.
+%
+% \begin{fontelement}{partnumber,part}
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{pre-added as macro}
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/23}{added}
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/02}{undocumented support for last macro expects an
+% argument}
+% \begin{fontelement}{partprefix}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/10}{alias added}
+% Definition of the font elements used by \cs{part}. The settings are done by
+% option \texttt{headings} later. Everything is prepared before this option is
+% used the first time. The elements are defined manually because of
+% compatibility with \KOMAScript~v2.8o before font elements has been
+% implemented in \KOMAScript~v2.8p.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*prepare>
+\newcommand*{\size@part}{}
+\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@part}{\size@part}
+\newcommand*{\size@partnumber}{}
+\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@partnumber}{\size@partnumber}
+\aliaskomafont{partprefix}{partnumber}
+%</prepare>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{fontelement}^^A partprefix
+% \end{fontelement}^^A partnumber,part
+%
+%
+% \begin{command}{\partheadstartvskip,\partheadendvskip}
+% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/10}{added}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{\cls*{scrartcl} defines and uses
+% \cs{scr@part@beforeskip} resp. \cs{scr@part@afterskip}}
+% \begin{command}{\partheadmidvskip}
+% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/10}{added}
+% \begin{command}{\parheademptypage}
+% \changes{v3.02}{2009/01/01}{added}
+% These commands are the distance before and after a part heading, between the
+% prefix line and the text line of the heading and also the empty retro page
+% of a part.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@part@sectionbeforeskip,\scr@part@beforeskip}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{added}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{\cs{scr@part@sectionbeforeskip} renamed to
+% \cs{scr@part@beforeskip}}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@part@sectionafterskip,\scr@part@sectionbeforeskip}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{added}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{\cs{scr@part@sectionafterskip} renamed to
+% \cs{scr@part@afterskip}}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@part@sectionindent}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{added}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/24}{removed}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@part@sectionindent
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@part@innerskip}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/24}{added}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@part@style}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{added}
+% All the skips and the page style are used by \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}
+% resp. the style \texttt{part}. We define it as early as possible. Even the
+% style of \cs{part} is already defined here.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Do we need them in the \texttt{prepare} run or can we move then
+% even to the \texttt{body} run?
+% \item[ToDo:] Do we really need to define \cs{scr@part@style}?
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*prepare>
+\newcommand*{\scr@part@beforeskip}{%
+%<article> 4ex
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] The |+\baselineskip| is needed, to stay as compatible as
+% possible with prior definitions of \cs{chapterheadstartvskip}.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<report|book> \z@ \@plus 1fil + \baselineskip
+}
+%<book|report>\newcommand*{\scr@part@innerskip}{20\p@}
+\newcommand*{\scr@part@afterskip}{%
+%<article> 3ex
+%<report|book> \z@ \@plus 1fil
+}
+\newcommand*{\scr@part@style}{part}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@part@style
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@part@afterskip
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@part@innerskip
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@part@beforeskip
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\partheadstartvskip}{%
+%<article> \addvspace{\@tempskipa}%
+%<report|book> \null\vskip-\baselineskip\vskip\@tempskipa
+}
+\newcommand*{\partheadmidvskip}{%
+ \par\nobreak
+%<book|report> \vskip\@tempskipa
+}
+\newcommand*{\partheadendvskip}{%
+%<article> \vskip\@tempskipa
+%<report|book> \vskip\@tempskipa\newpage
+}
+%<*report|book>
+\newcommand*{\partheademptypage}{%
+ \if@twoside\if@openright
+ \null%
+ \thispagestyle{empty}%
+ \newpage
+ \fi\fi
+}
+%</report|book>
+%</prepare>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \partheademptypage
+% \end{command}^^A \partheadmidvskip
+% \end{command}^^A \partheadstartvskip,\partheadendvskip
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@startpart}
+% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{using \cs{partpagestyle}}
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/27}{preamble above heading}
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{using \cs{SecDef}}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{added}
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/25}{ignoring empty \cs{partpagestyle}}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/10/14}{supporting option \opt{afterindent}}
+% \changes{v3.28}{2019/11/18}{\cs{ifstr} renamed to \cs{Ifstr}}
+% The macro
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{scr@startpart}\marg{part command name}
+% \end{quote}
+% is now part of the style \texttt{part}. However, the main parts
+% of the code are from the original definition of \cs{part}. It has only one
+% argument: The name of the part command, i.e., \texttt{part}. All arguments
+% to the part command will be processed later.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\scr@startpart}[1]{%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/preinit/#1}%
+%<article> \par
+%<*book|report>
+ \if@openright\cleardoublepage\else\clearpage\fi
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{#1pagestyle}{}{%
+ \Ifstr{#1pagestyle}{}{}{%
+ \thispagestyle{\@nameuse{#1pagestyle}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \onecolumn
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \else
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \fi
+%</book|report>
+ \@tempskipa=\glueexpr\@nameuse{scr@#1@beforeskip}\relax
+ \@ifundefined{scr@#1@afterindent}{\@afterindentfalse}{%
+ \csname scr@#1@afterindent\endcsname
+ {\@afterindenttrue}{\@afterindentfalse}{%
+ \@afterindenttrue
+ \ifdim\@tempskipa<\z@
+ \@tempskipa=-\@tempskipa
+ \@afterindentfalse
+ \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/postinit/#1}%
+ \partheadstartvskip
+%<*book|report>
+ \vbox to\z@{\vss\use@preamble{#1@o}\strut\par}%
+ \vskip-\baselineskip\nobreak
+%</book|report>
+ \expandafter\SecDef\csname @#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname @s#1\endcsname
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@@startpart}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{@parskipfalse}\cs{@parskip@indent}}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/13}{\cs{centering} and \cs{@parskipfalse}%
+% \cs{@parskip@indent} switched}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{\cs{@parskipfalse} and \cs{@parskip@indent}
+% replaced}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{added}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/08}{support for option \opt{nonumber}}
+% The macro
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{scr@@startpart}\marg{part command name}\oarg{extended optional
+% argument}\marg{part heading}
+% \end{quote}
+% is now part of the style \texttt{part}. However, the main parts
+% of the code are from the original definition of \cs{@part}. Therefore it has
+% the mandatory and optional arguments of a non-star variant of, i.e.,
+% \cs{part} but an additional first argument.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] \meta{extended optional argument} is named as optional, however
+% here it is already mandatory, because it is a delimited argument.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\scr@@startpart}{}
+\long\def\scr@@startpart#1[#2]#3{%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/branch/nostar/#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{extended optional argument}
+% First of all, depending in \opt{headings=optionto\dots} we have different
+% defaults for the options.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum \scr@osectarg=\z@
+ \@scr@tempswafalse
+ \else
+ \scr@istest#2=\@nil
+ \fi
+ \@currentusenumbertrue
+ \if@scr@tempswa
+ \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#3},head={#3},reference={#3},#2}%
+ \else
+ \ifcase \scr@osectarg\relax
+ \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#2},head={#2},reference={#2}}%
+ \or
+ \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#3},head={#2},reference={#3}}%
+ \or
+ \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#2},head={#3},reference={#2}}%
+ \or
+ \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#2},head={#2},reference={#2}}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.8e}{2001/07/10}{using \cs{@maybeautodot}}
+% \changes{v3.28}{2019/11/19}{\cs{ifnumbered} renamed to
+% \cs{Ifnumbered}}
+% \changes{v3.31}{2020/06/02}{\cs{@maybeautodot}\cs{thepart} removed}
+% For numbered headings we have to increase the counter and write a process
+% information to the \file{log} and the terminal.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \Ifnumbered{#1}{%
+ \refstepcounter{#1}%
+ \expandafter\@maybeautodot\csname the#1\endcsname
+ \typeout{#1 \csname the#1\endcsname.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/01}{using \cs{addparttocentry}}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{using \cs{add\meta{Name}tocentry} for
+% \cs{typeout}}
+% \changes{v3.31}{2020/06/06}{using \cs{\dots tocformat}}
+% And if the ToC entry is not empty add a numbered entry to the table of
+% contents.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Move \cs{autodot} to the definition of \cs{\dots tocformat}.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\@currenttocentry\@empty\else
+ \@ifundefined{#1tocformat}{%
+ \expandafter\gdef\csname #1tocformat\endcsname
+ {\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+ }{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{add#1tocentry}{%
+ \addtocentrydefault{#1}%
+ }{%
+ \@nameuse{add#1tocentry}%
+ }{\csname\@ifundefined{#1tocformat}{the#1}{#1tocformat}\endcsname}%
+ {\@currenttocentry}%
+ \fi
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{execute counter reset list for not numbered
+% headings}
+% For not numbered headings we still have to process the reset list of the
+% counter and write a process information to the \file{log} and the terminal.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@lt{3.18}\relax\else
+ \begingroup
+ \let\@elt\@stpelt
+ \csname cl@#1\endcsname
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+ \typeout{#1 without number}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/01}{using \cs{addparttocentry}}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{generalized \cs{addparttocentry}}
+% And before writing a not numbered entry to the table of contents we have to
+% execute also the \pkg{hyperref} hook \cs{hy@insteadofrefstepcounter}.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] \pkg*{scrhack} uses the existence of this command to detect a
+% \KOMAScript{} class. Shouldn't this be changed using, e.g.,
+% \cs{KOMAClassName}?
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\@currenttocentry\@empty\else
+ \hy@insteadofrefstepcounter{#1}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{add#1tocentry}{%
+ \addtocentrydefault{#1}%
+ }{%
+ \@nameuse{add#1tocentry}%
+ }{}{\@currenttocentry}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.2c}{1995/05/25}{support for CJK}
+% \changes{v2.4b}{1996/03/29}{\cs{size@partnumer} replaced by
+% \cs{size@partnumber}}
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/22}{\cs{sectfont} used before \cs{size@part} or
+% \cs{size@partnumber}}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/28}{\cs{nobreak} after \cs{sectfont}}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{\cs{size@\dots} replaced by \cs{usekomafont}}
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{missing \cs{nobreak} added}
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{defining \cs{IfUseNumber} locally}
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{\cs{sectfont} replaced by \cs{usekomafont}}
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{using \cs{partlineswithprefixformat}}
+% \changes{v3.25}{2018/02/12}{using correct fontelement}
+% \changes{v3.28}{2019/11/19}{\cs{ifnumbered} renamed to
+% \cs{Ifnumbered}}
+% Now the main printing code.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] This code is almost the same as \cs{scr@@startchapter}. Only
+% the procession of the reset list was there already with
+% \KOMAScript~v3.15. And in \cs{scr@@startchapter} we are using
+% \cs{@make\meta{name}head} here. So maybe we should do the same here and
+% really use the same definition instead of having it twice.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \def\IfUseNumber{\Ifnumbered{#1}}%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/begingroup/#1}%
+ \setparsizes{\z@}{\z@}{\z@\@plus 1fil}\par@updaterelative
+ \raggedpart
+ \normalfont\usekomafont{disposition}{\nobreak
+ \IfUseNumber{%
+ \partlineswithprefixformat{#1}{%
+ \usekomafont{#1prefix}{\nobreak\@nameuse{#1format}}%
+%<book|report> \setlength{\@tempskipa}{\@nameuse{scr@#1@innerskip}}%
+ \partheadmidvskip
+ }{%
+ \usekomafont{#1}{\nobreak\interlinepenalty \@M#3\strut\@@par}%
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \partlineswithprefixformat{#1}{}{%
+ \usekomafont{#1}{\nobreak\interlinepenalty \@M#3\strut\@@par}%
+ }
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{using\cs{@mkboth{}{}} if \cs{partmark} is
+% \cs{@gobble}}
+% The running head.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname #1mark\endcsname\@gobble
+ \@mkboth{}{}%
+ \else
+ \csname #1mark\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter{\@currentheadentry}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/endgroup/#1}%
+ \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The final distance.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*article>
+ \nobreak
+ \@tempskipa=\glueexpr\@nameuse{scr@#1@afterskip}\relax\relax
+ \ifdim\@tempskipa<\z@\@tempskipa-\@tempskipa\fi
+ \partheadendvskip
+%</article>
+%<book|report> \@nameuse{@end#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/10/14}{using \@cs{@afterheading} with
+% \cls*{scrbook} or \cls*{scrreprt}}
+% And \cs{@afterheading} for all classes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@afterheading
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@@startpart
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@@startspart}
+% \changes{v2.4n}{1997/05/28}{added \cs{chaptermark} resp.
+% \cs{sectionmark} to star variant}
+% \changes{v2.6a}{2000/01/20}{using \cs{@mkboth} to delete the running head}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{@parskipfalse}\cs{@parskip@indent}}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/13}{\cs{centering} and
+% \cs{@parskipfalse}\cs{@parskip@indent} swapped}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{\cs{@parskipfalse} and\cs{@parskip@indent}
+% replaced}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{added}
+% The macro
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{scr@@startspart}\marg{part command name}\marg{part heading}
+% \end{quote}
+% is now part of the style \texttt{part}. However, the main parts
+% of the code are from the original definition of \cs{@spart}. Therefore it has
+% the mandatory argument of a star variant of, i.e., \cs{part} but an
+% additional first argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\scr@@startspart}[2]{%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/branch/star/#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Some users don't learn to use \cs{addpart} for not numbered parts with entry
+% to the table of contents but insist in using \cs{addcontentsline}. Despite
+% this should not be used, because at least \cs{addparttocentry} should be
+% used, we tolerate this by using our \pkg{hyperref} hook.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] I don't understand why \pkg{hyperref} uses a group here and
+% locally sets \cs{@mkboth} to \cs{@gobbletwo}. However, I've copied this.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+ \hy@insteadofrefstepcounter{#1}%
+ \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{missing \cs{nobreak} added}
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{difining \cs{IfUseNumber} locally}
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{\cs{sectfont} replaced by \cs{usekomafont}}
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{using \cs{partlineswithprefixformat}}
+% Now the printing similar to \cs{scr@@startpart}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \let\IfUseNumber\@secondoftwo
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/begingroup/#1}%
+ \setparsizes{\z@}{\z@}{\z@\@plus 1fil}\par@updaterelative
+ \raggedpart
+ \normalfont\usekomafont{disposition}{%
+ \nobreak
+ \partlineswithprefixformat{#1}{}{%
+ \usekomafont{#1}{\nobreak\interlinepenalty \@M#2\strut\@@par}%
+ }%
+ \@mkboth{}{}%
+ }%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/endgroup/#1}%
+ \endgroup
+%<*article>
+ \nobreak
+ \@tempskipa=\glueexpr\csname scr@#1@afterskip\endcsname\relax\relax
+ \ifdim\@tempskipa<\z@\@tempskipa-\@tempskipa\fi
+ \partheadendvskip
+ \@afterheading
+%</article>
+%<book|report> \@nameuse{@end#1}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@@startspart
+%
+% \begin{command}{\partlineswithprefixformat}
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{added}
+% Command
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{partlineswithprefixformat}\marg{command name}\marg{number}\marg{text}
+% \end{quote}
+% is used to print a part heading with a prefix line. \meta{number} is the
+% completely formatted prefix line inclusive the vertical distance below. The
+% \meta{text} is the text of the heading also formatted and with final
+% \cs{@@par}. But if the user uses more paragraphs than this final one, the
+% user is responsible to prevent page breaks!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\partlineswithprefixformat}[3]{%
+ #2#3%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \partlineswithprefixformat
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@@endpart}
+% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{\cs{@endpart} not defined for \cls*{scrartcl}}
+% \changes{v2.4e}{1996/07/02}{supporting option \opt{openany}}
+% \changes{v2.6c}{2000/06/10}{\cs{@endpart} respects \opt{open\quotechar=right}}
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/27}{\cs{vbox} added}
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/27}{\cs{@part@preamble} replaced by \cs{use@preamble}}
+% \changes{v3.02}{2009/01/01}{using \cs{partheademptypage}}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{added}
+% Before \KOMAScript~v3.18 this code was part of \cs{part}. \cls*{scrbook} and
+% \cls*{scrreprt} use this macro to finalize the heading, e.g., print a
+% preamble, to the final distance or new page and add an empty retro
+% page. \cls*{scrartcl} does not have such a command, because with
+% \cls*{scrartcl} parts are simple headings not pages. As usual the argument
+% is the name of the part command, e.g., \texttt{part}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*book|report>
+\newcommand*{\scr@@endpart}[1]{%
+ \vbox to\z@{\use@preamble{#1@u}\vss}%
+ \@tempskipa=\glueexpr\csname scr@#1@afterskip\endcsname\relax\relax
+ \ifdim\@tempskipa<\z@\@tempskipa-\@tempskipa\fi
+ \partheadendvskip
+ \partheademptypage
+ \if@tempswa
+ \twocolumn
+ \fi
+}
+%</book|report>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@@endpart
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@startpart
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hy@insteadofrefstepcounter}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{added to be used by \pkg{hyperref}}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@chapter@before@hyperref@patch}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/24}{added to be used by \pkg*{scrhack}}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@chapter@after@hyperref@patch}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/24}{added to be used by \pkg*{scrhack}}
+% \changes{v3.32}{2020/09/11}{\cs{AfterPackage!} replaced by
+% \cs{AfterAtEndOfPackage}}
+% Usually \pkg{hyperref} uses \cs{refstepcounter} to process extra codes for
+% anchors and bookmarks. However, if a not numbered heading is used,
+% \pkg{hyperref} cannot use \cs{refstepcounter} but still has to add
+% code. Usually \pkg{hyperref} patchs several commands like \cs{@chapter},
+% \cs{@schapter}, \cs{@part}, \cs{@spart} etc. to do so. But I think, it would
+% be better to provide a hook for this, \pkg*{hyperref} can change. So we've
+% designed \cs{hy@insteadofrefstepcounter}. Unfortunately \pkg{hyperref}
+% currently does not care for this, but still does its patches. So we need to
+% prevent \pkg{hyperref} from doing so and additionally define
+% \cs{hy@insteadofrefstepcounter} ourselves. But because \cs{autoref} is
+% nonsense for not numbered headings, I do not use \cs{Hy@chapapp} for
+% \cs{Hy@MakeCurrentHrefAuto}.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Explain the Oberdiek support team, what we are doing here and
+% what they should do.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\hy@insteadofrefstepcounter}[1]{}
+\let\hy@insteadofrefstepcounter\@gobble
+\newcommand*{\scr@chapter@before@hyperref@patch}{%
+ \let\scr@orig@chapter\@chapter
+ \let\scr@orig@schapter\@schapter
+ \let\scr@orig@addchap\@addchap
+}
+\BeforePackage{hyperref}{\scr@chapter@before@hyperref@patch}
+\newcommand*{\scr@chapter@after@hyperref@patch}{%
+ \let\@chapter\scr@orig@chapter
+ \let\@schapter\scr@orig@schapter
+ \let\@addchap\scr@orig@addchap
+ \ifx\hy@insteadofrefstepcounter\@gobble
+ \renewcommand*{\hy@insteadofrefstepcounter}[1]{%
+ \Hy@MakeCurrentHrefAuto{##1*}%
+ \Hy@raisedlink{%
+ \hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}\hyper@anchorend
+ }%
+ }%
+ \fi
+}
+\AfterAtEndOfPackage{hyperref}{\scr@chapter@after@hyperref@patch}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@after@hyperref@patch
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@before@hyperref@patch
+% \end{macro}^^A \hy@insteadofrefstepcounter
+%
+% \begin{command}{\addparttocentry}
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/01}{added}
+% We do not use \cs{addcontentsline} directly for the entries to the table of
+% contents. Using
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{addparttocentry}\marg{number}\marg{text}
+% \end{quote}
+% allows easy manipulation of such entries and additional actions. If the
+% \meta{number} is completely empty no number should be used. Internally the
+% generic \cs{addtocentrydefault} it used, which uses \cs{nonumberline}
+% instead of \cs{numberline} in this case. See \file{scrkernel-listsof.dtx}
+% for more information.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\addparttocentry}[2]{%
+ \addtocentrydefault{part}{#1}{#2}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \addparttocentry
+%
+%
+% \begin{command}{\part}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{indirect definition}
+% \begin{macro}{\@part,\@spart,\@endpart}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{indirect definition}
+% \begin{command}{\setpartpreamble}
+% \changes{v2.8f}{2001/07/12}{added}
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/27}{using \cs{use@preamble}}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{indirect definition}
+% \begin{macro}{\part@preamble,\part@u@preamble}
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/27}{added}
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/27}{\cs{part@preamble} renamed to \cs{part@u@preamble}}
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/02/14}{name fixed}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{indirect definition}
+% \begin{macro}{\part@o@preamble}
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/27}{added}
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/02/14}{name fixed}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{indirect definition}
+% All these commands and macros are not defined explicitly but by using
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} later. See also
+% \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@part@command} and \cs{setpartpreamble}.
+% \end{macro}^^A \part@o@preamble
+% \end{macro}^^A \part@u@preamble
+% \end{command}^^A \setpartpreamble
+% \end{macro}^^A \@part,\@spart,\@endpart
+% \end{command}^^A \part
+%
+% \begin{command}{\addpart}
+% \changes{v2.8c}{2001/06/29}{added}
+% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{using \cs{partpagestyle}}
+% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/10}{support of preamble added}
+% \changes{v3.11b}{2012/07/29}{missing negativ \cs{vskip} added}
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{using \cs{SecDef}}
+% \changes{v3.15a}{2015/01/22}{distance adaption}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/25}{redefinition}
+% \begin{macro}{\@addpart}
+% \changes{v2.8c}{2001/06/29}{added}
+% \changes{v2.8l}{2001/08/17}{first ToC then output}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/20}{support for running head}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/01}{\pkg{hyperref} workaround}
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/02}{using \cs{addparttocentry}}
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{extended optional argument}
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{using \cs{@mkboth{}{}} if \cs{partmark} is
+% \cs{@gobble}}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/20}{using \cs{addpartmark} but never \cs{@mkboth}}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/25}{redefinition}
+% \begin{macro}{\@saddpart}
+% \changes{v2.8c}{2001/06/29}{added}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/25}{redefinition}
+% The improved not numbered version of \cs{part}. Note: This could also be
+% done using the extended optional argument of \cs{part} and option
+% \opt{nonumber=true}. So this command becomes more and more deprecated.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\addpart{%
+ \SecDef\@addpart\@saddpart
+}
+\newcommand*{\@addpart}{}
+\long\def\@addpart[#1]#2{%
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \unexpanded{%
+ \part[{#1}]{#2}%
+ \c@secnumdepth=
+ }\the\c@secnumdepth\relax
+ }%
+ \c@secnumdepth=\numexpr \partnumdepth-1\relax
+ \reserved@a
+}
+\newcommand{\@saddpart}[1]{%
+ \part*{#1}%
+ \addpartmark{}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \@saddpart
+% \end{macro}^^A \@addpart
+% \end{command}^^A \addpart
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@part}
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{\cs{sectfont}\cs{large} replaced by font
+% element \fnt{partentry}}
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{using font element \fnt{partentrypagenumber}}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/23}{using \cs{parttocdepth} and
+% \cs{scr@part@numwidth}}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/06}{replaced by usage of ToC style}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@part@tocindent}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/02}{added}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/09}{indirect by \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@part@tocindent
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@part@tocnumwidth}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/02}{added}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/09}{indirect by\cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}
+% These macros are not longer defined explicitly but by
+% \cs{DeclareTOCEntryStyle} and indirectly by \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}.
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}^^A \l@part
+%
+%
+% \begin{counter}{part}
+% \begin{command}{\thepart}
+% \begin{command}{\partformat}
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{auto dot feature}
+% \changes{v2.5f}{1999/02/14}{orphan spaces removed}
+% \changes{v2.7h}{2001/04/22}{missing backslash of \cs{autodot} fixed}
+% Because we don't use the default Arabic numbering, we still define the
+% counter for \cs{part}, it's printing and the formatting explicitly.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{part}
+\renewcommand*{\thepart}{\@Roman\c@part}
+\newcommand*{\partformat}{\partname~\thepart\autodot}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \partformat
+% \end{command}^^A \thepart
+% \end{counter}{part}
+%
+%
+% \begin{command}{\partname}
+% \changes{v3.36}{2022/03/15}{explicit definition for English languages}
+% The name of a part used for the prefix line and maybe for the ToC entry.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\partname{Part}
+\providecaptionname{american,australian,british,canadian,english,newzealand,%
+ UKenglish,ukenglish,USenglish,usenglish}\partname{Part}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \partname
+%
+%
+% \begin{command}{\partmark}
+% \changes{v2.9r}{2004/07/20}{added}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/24}{default changed from \cs{@gobble} to
+% \cs{@mkboth{}{}}}
+% Initially \cs{part} should simply empty the left and right mark if an
+% automatic running head is used. This is independent from the page style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\partmark}[1]{\@mkboth{}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \partmark
+%
+% \begin{command}{\addpartmark}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/20}{added}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/24}{depends on \cs{partnumdepth}}
+% To be used to add the marks with \cs{addpart}. Locally we define
+% \cs{if@mainmatter}, because it makes life easier for users or package
+% authors, who (re-)define \cs{partmark}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\addpartmark[1]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \expandafter\let\csname if@mainmatter\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname iffalse\endcsname
+ \c@secnumdepth=\numexpr \partnumdepth-1\relax
+ \partmark{#1}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \addpartmark
+%
+%
+% \begin{command}{\raggedpart}
+% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/10}{added}
+% Style \texttt{part} does not use \cs{raggedsection} but
+% \cs{raggedpart}. However for \cls*{scrartcl} the default is the same. But
+% \cls*{scrbook} and \cls*{scrreprt} use \cs{centering} as default.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] Because of using \cs{let} inside a class, \cs{raggedright}
+% should be without hyphenation when we define \cs{raggedpart}.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\raggedpart}{}
+%<article>\let\raggedpart\raggedsection
+%<report|book>\let\raggedpart\centering
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}
+%
+% \begin{fontelement}{partentry}
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{added}
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/09}{\fnt{sectioning} replaced by \fnt{disposition}}
+% \cs{part} entries to the table of contents are \cs{large}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newkomafont{partentry}{\usekomafont{disposition}\large}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{fontelement}
+%
+% \begin{fontelement}{partentrypagenumber}
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{added}
+% The page number of the ToC entry should be unchanged.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newkomafont{partentrypagenumber}{}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{fontelement}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Chapters}
+%
+% Classes \cls*{scrbook} and \cls*{scrreprt} provide chapters. These are
+% realized by \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} and the \texttt{chapter} style. The
+% style is represented by \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command} and several
+% helpers.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] Package \pkg{hyperref} is not really compatible with
+% \KOMAScript{} classes, because it redefines \cs{@schapter} and
+% \cs{@chapter} incompatible. However, currently \KOMAScript{} has a build
+% in workaround for this. But this workaround itself depends on internal
+% code of \pkg{hyperref}. It would be better, if \pkg{hyperref} would
+% provide an interface for class authors and would redefine internal macros
+% of classes only as fallback if classes do not use this
+% interface. \KOMAScript{} also provides an alternative. \pkg*{hyperref}
+% could redefine a single command \cs{hy@insteadofrefstepcounter}.
+% \item[Note:] Any package, that changes internal macros like \cs{@chapter},
+% \cs{@schapter}, \cs{@makechapterhead}, \cs{@makeschapterhead} is
+% incompatible with \KOMAScript{} classes. Neither \KOMAScript{} nor the
+% \KOMAScript{} author is responsible for this. Package authors are welcome
+% to ask for interfaces they need, e.g., a good idea would be to define a
+% own headings style.
+% \end{description}
+%
+% \begin{option}{chapterprefix}
+% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{added}
+% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{changed to \pkg{keyval} option}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{option correlates with style not level}
+% \begin{macro}{\@chapterprefixtrue,\@chapterprefixfalse,\if@chapterprefix}
+% Initially \KOMAScript{} does not use the enormous chapter headings with
+% prefix line ``Chapter \meta{number}'' but a more subtle one. However, either
+% \opt{chapterprefix} or \opt{headings=twolinechapter} can be used to
+% reactivate the prefix line. The current setting is available via the boolean
+% switch \cs{if@chapterprefix}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*book|report>
+%<prepare>\newif\if@chapterprefix
+%<*option>
+\KOMA@key{chapterprefix}[true]{%
+ \KOMA@set@ifkey{chapterprefix}{@chapterprefix}{#1}%
+ \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ \KOMA@kav@replacebool{.\KOMAClassFileName}%
+ {chapterprefix}{@chapterprefix}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}%
+ {headings}{twolinechapter}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}%
+ {headings}{onelinechapter}%
+ \KOMA@kav@xadd{.\KOMAClassFileName}%
+ {headings}{%
+ \if@chapterprefix twolinechapter\else onelinechapter\fi
+ }%
+ \fi
+}
+\KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{onelinechapter}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{option}{nochapterprefix}
+% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{added}
+% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{obsolete}
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}
+% Deprecated option for compatibility with \KOMAScript~2.9u only.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{nochapterprefix}{chapterprefix=false}
+%</option>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{option}^^A nochapterprefix
+% \end{macro}^^A \if@chapterprefix
+% \end{option}^^A chapterprefix
+%
+%
+% \begin{option}{appendixprefix}
+% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{added}
+% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{re-implementation as \pkg{keyval} option}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{usage of \cs{FamilyKeyState}}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{internal value storage}
+% \changes{v3.34}{2021/04/30}{usage of \LaTeX{} hook, if available}
+% \changes{v3.34}{2021/04/30}{new value \opt{\quotechar=default} with \LaTeX{}
+% hooks}
+% If the appendix chapters should be with or without prefix line independent
+% from the chapters of the main part, option \opt{appendixprefix} can be
+% used. This does not set up a new boolean but just activates or deactivates
+% the boolean for chapters inside \cs{appendix}. From \KOMAScript{} v3.34 and
+% \LaTeX{} 2020/10/01 this is done using a new \LaTeX{} hook. Otherwise still
+% \cs{appendixmore} is used. Default is, using the settings for chapters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*option>
+\IfLTXAtLeastTF{2020/10/01}{%
+ \KOMA@key{appendixprefix}[true]{%
+ \Ifstr{#1}{default}{%
+ \KOMA@kav@removekey{.\KOMAClassFileName}{appendixprefix}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{twolineappendix}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{onelineappendix}%
+ \IfHookEmptyTF{\KOMAClassName/appendix}{}{%
+ \RemoveFromHook{\KOMAClassName/appendix}[appendixprefix]%
+ }%
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }{%
+ \KOMA@set@ifkey{appendixprefix}{@tempswa}{#1}%
+ \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ \KOMA@kav@xreplacevalue{.\KOMAClassFileName}{appendixprefix}{#1}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{twolineappendix}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{onelineappendix}%
+ \IfHookEmptyTF{\KOMAClassName/appendix}{}{%
+ \RemoveFromHook{\KOMAClassName/appendix}[appendixprefix]%
+ }%
+ \if@tempswa
+ \KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{twolineappendix}%
+ \AddToHook{\KOMAClassName/appendix}[appendixprefix]%
+ {\@chapterprefixtrue}%
+ \else
+ \KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{onelineappendix}%
+ \AddToHook{\KOMAClassName/appendix}[appendixprefix]%
+ {\@chapterprefixfalse}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+}{%
+ \KOMA@key{appendixprefix}[true]{%
+ \KOMA@set@ifkey{appendixprefix}{@tempswa}{#1}%
+ \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ \KOMA@kav@xreplacevalue{.\KOMAClassFileName}{appendixprefix}{#1}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{twolineappendix}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{onelineappendix}%
+ \if@tempswa
+ \KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{twolineappendix}%
+ \@ifundefined{appendixmore}{%
+ \def\appendixmore{\@chapterprefixtrue}%
+ }{%
+ \l@addto@macro\appendixmore{\@chapterprefixtrue}%
+ }%
+ \else
+ \KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{onelineappendix}%
+ \@ifundefined{appendixmore}{%
+ \def\appendixmore{\@chapterprefixfalse}%
+ }{%
+ \l@addto@macro\appendixmore{\@chapterprefixfalse}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{option}{noappendixprefix}
+% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{added}
+% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{obsolete}
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{noappendixprefix}{appendixprefix=false}
+%</option>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{option}^^A noappendixprefix
+% \end{option}^^A appendixprefix
+%
+%
+% \begin{fontelement}{chapter}
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{added}
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/02}{undocumented support for last macro expects an
+% argument}
+% \begin{fontelement}{chapterprefix}
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{added by macro}
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/02}{added}
+% Definition of the font elements used by \cs{chapter}. The settings are done
+% by option \opt{headings} later. Everything is prepared before this option
+% is used the first time. The manual definition is used, because of
+% compatibility with \KOMAScript{} 2.9u. However, using the old macros is
+% deprecated and not supported any longer.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*prepare>
+\newcommand*{\size@chapter}{}
+\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@chapter}{\size@chapter}
+\newcommand*{\size@chapterprefix}{\size@chapter}
+\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@chapterprefix}{\size@chapterprefix}
+%</prepare>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{fontelement}^^A chapterprefix
+% \end{fontelement}^^A chapter
+%
+%
+% \begin{command}{\chapterheadstartvskip}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{defining and using \cs{scr@chapter@beforeskip}}
+% \begin{command}{\chapterheadmidvskip}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/20}{added}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{defining and using \cs{scr@chapter@innerskip}}
+% \begin{command}{\chapterheadendvskip}
+% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/02/13}{\cs{chapterheadstartvskip} and
+% \cs{chapterheadendvskip} removed from \cls*{scrartcl}}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{defining and using \cs{scr@chapter@afterskip}}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{\cs{vspace} replaced by \cs{vskip} because of
+% \cs{lastskip}}
+% These commands are the distance before a chapter heading, between the
+% prefix line and the text line of the heading and after the chapter heading.
+% \cs{chapterheadmidvskip} is only used with option \opt{chapterprefix}
+% resp. \opt{headings=twolinechapter}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@chapter@sectionbeforeskip,\scr@chapter@beforeskip}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{added}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{\cs{scr@chapter@sectionbeforeskip} renamed to
+% \cs{scr@chapter@beforeskip}}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@chapter@innerskip}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{added}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@chapter@sectionafterskip,\scr@chapter@afterskip}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{added}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{\cs{scr@chapter@sectionafterskip} renamed to
+% \cs{scr@chapter@afterskip}}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@chapter@sectionindent}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{added}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/24}{removed}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@chapter@sectionindent
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@chapter@style}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{added}
+% All the skips and the page style are used by \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}
+% resp. the style \texttt{chapter}. We define it as early as possible. Even the
+% style of \cs{chapter} is already defined here.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Do we need them in the \texttt{prepare} run or can we move then
+% even to the \texttt{body} run?
+% \item[ToDo:] Do we really need to define \cs{scr@chapter@style}?
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*prepare>
+\newcommand*{\scr@chapter@beforeskip}{\z@}
+\let\scr@chapter@beforeskip\z@
+\newcommand*{\scr@chapter@afterskip}{\z@}
+\let\scr@chapter@afterskip\z@
+\newcommand*{\scr@chapter@innerskip}{\z@}
+\let\scr@chapter@innerskip\z@
+\newcommand*{\scr@chapter@style}{chapter}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@chapter@style
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@chapter@afterskip
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@chapter@innerskip
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@chapter@beforeskip
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\chapterheadstartvskip}{\vspace{\@tempskipa}}
+\newcommand*{\chapterheadendvskip}{\vskip\@tempskipa}
+\newcommand*{\chapterheadmidvskip}{\par\nobreak\vskip\@tempskipa}
+%</prepare>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \chapterheadendvskip
+% \end{command}^^A \chapterheadmidvskip
+% \end{command}^^A \chapterheadstartvskip
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@startchapter}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{added}
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/25}{ignore empty page styles}
+% The macro
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{scr@startchapter}\marg{chapter command name}
+% \end{quote}
+% is now part of the style \texttt{chapter}. However, the main parts
+% of the code are from the original definition of \cs{chapter}. It has only one
+% argument: The name of the chapter command, i.e., \texttt{chapter}. All
+% arguments to the part command will be processed later.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\scr@startchapter}[1]{%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/preinit/#1}%
+ \if@openright\cleardoublepage\else\clearpage\fi
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{#1pagestyle}{}{%
+ \Ifstr{#1pagestyle}{}{}{%
+ \thispagestyle{\@nameuse{#1pagestyle}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \global\@topnum\z@
+ \@ifundefined{scr@#1@afterindent}{\@afterindentfalse}{%
+ \csname scr@#1@afterindent\endcsname
+ {\@afterindenttrue}{\@afterindentfalse}{%
+ \@afterindenttrue
+ \@ifundefined{scr@#1@beforeskip}{\@afterindentfalse}{%
+ \ifdim\glueexpr\@nameuse{scr@#1@beforeskip}\relax<\z@
+ \@afterindentfalse
+ \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/postinit/#1}%
+ \expandafter\SecDef\csname @#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname @s#1\endcsname
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@@startchapter}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{added}
+% The macro
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{scr@@startchapter}\marg{chapter command name}\oarg{extended optional
+% argument}\marg{chapter heading}
+% \end{quote}
+% is now part of the style \texttt{chapter}. However, the main parts
+% of the code are from the original definition of \cs{@chapter}. Therefore it
+% has the mandatory and optional arguments of a non-star variant of, i.e.,
+% \cs{chapter} but an additional first argument.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] \meta{extended optional argument} is named as optional, however
+% here it is already mandatory, because it is a delimited argument.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@@startchapter}{}
+\def\scr@@startchapter#1[#2]#3{%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/branch/nostar/#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{extended optional argument}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/08}{option \opt{nonumber} added}
+% First of all, depending in \opt{headings=optionto\dots} we have different
+% defaults for the options.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum \scr@osectarg=\z@
+ \@scr@tempswafalse
+ \else
+ \scr@istest#2=\@nil
+ \fi
+ \@currentusenumbertrue
+ \if@scr@tempswa
+ \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#3},head={#3},reference={#3},#2}%
+ \else
+ \ifcase \scr@osectarg\relax
+ \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#2},head={#2},reference={#2}}%
+ \or
+ \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#3},head={#2},reference={#3}}%
+ \or
+ \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#2},head={#3},reference={#2}}%
+ \or
+ \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#2},head={#2},reference={#2}}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.8e}{2001/07/10}{using \cs{@maybeautodot}}
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/01}{using \cs{addchaptertocentry}}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{using \cs{add\meta{name}tocentry}}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{using \meta{name} instead of \cs{@chapapp}
+% in \cs{typeout}}
+% \changes{v3.28}{2019/11/19}{\cs{ifnumbered} renamed to
+% \cs{Ifnumbered}}
+% For numbered headings we have to increase the counter and write a process
+% information to the \file{log} and the terminal.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \Ifnumbered{#1}{%
+%<book> \if@mainmatter
+ \@tempswatrue
+%<book> \else\@tempswafalse\fi
+ }{\@tempswafalse}%
+ \if@tempswa
+ \refstepcounter{#1}%
+ \expandafter\@maybeautodot\csname the#1\endcsname
+ \typeout{#1 \csname the#1\endcsname.}%
+ \ifx\@currenttocentry\@empty\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.31}{2020/06/06}{using \cs{\dots tocformat}}%
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo]: Move \cs{autodot} to the definition of \cs{\dots tocformat}.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{#1tocformat}{%
+ \expandafter\gdef\csname #1tocformat\endcsname
+ {\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+ }{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{add#1tocentry}{%
+ \addtocentrydefault{#1}%
+ }{%
+ \@nameuse{add#1tocentry}%
+ }{\csname\@ifundefined{#1tocformat}{the#1}{#1tocformat}\endcsname}%
+ {\@currenttocentry}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For not numbered headings we still have to process the reset list of the
+% counter and write a process information to the \file{log} and the terminal.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@lt{3.15}\relax\else
+ \begingroup
+ \let\@elt\@stpelt
+ \csname cl@#1\endcsname
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+ \typeout{#1 without number}%
+ \ifx\@currenttocentry\@empty\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% And before writing a not numbered entry to the table of contents we have to
+% execute also the \pkg{hyperref} hook \cs{hy@insteadofrefstepcounter}.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] \pkg*{scrhack} uses the existence of this command to detect a
+% \KOMAScript{} class. Shouldn't this be changed using, e.g.,
+% \cs{KOMAClassName}?
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \hy@insteadofrefstepcounter{#1}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{add#1tocentry}{%
+ \addtocentrydefault{#1}%
+ }{%
+ \@nameuse{add#1tocentry}%
+ }{}{\@currenttocentry}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Set the mark for the running head. Here we have to do a one step expansion
+% of \cs{@currentheadentry}, because otherwise it would change with every
+% \cs{section}, \cs{subsection} \dots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \csname #1mark\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter{\@currentheadentry}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.8g}{2001/07/18}{support for \cs{float@addtolists}}
+% \changes{v3.28}{2019/11/19}{\cs{iftocfeature} replaced by \cs{Iftocfeature}}
+% Depending on feature \texttt{chapteratlist} we have to add a vertical space
+% to other directories. And for compatibility we also support the deprecated
+% \cs{float@addtolists} but not without warning.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Why do we add the gap here but also use \cs{addctontentsline}
+% in \cs{addchaptertocentry}? Is this a bug? Should this be standardized?
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim \@chapterlistsgap>\z@
+ \doforeachtocfile{%
+ \Iftocfeature{\@currext}{chapteratlist}{%
+ \addtocontents{\@currext}{\protect\addvspace{\@chapterlistsgap}}%
+ }{}%
+ }%
+ \@ifundefined{float@addtolists}{}{%
+ \scr@float@addtolists@warning
+ \float@addtolists{\protect\addvspace{\@chapterlistsgap}}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{\cs{@makechapterhead} replaced by
+% \cs{@make\meta{Name}head}}
+% \changes{v3.36}{2022/03/16}{warning about deprecated \cs{@makechapterhead}}
+% Setting the heading itself is more or less a call of \cs{@make\meta{command
+% name}head}.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Using \cs{scr@makechapterhead}\marg{command name} would be the
+% better solution. However in this case, every redefinition of
+% \cs{@makechapterhead} would be ignored. So currently we support such
+% deprecated redefinition of internal macro \cs{@makechapterhead} for
+% \cs{chapter}. But this will be changed in future.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \scr@t@st@nd@w@rn@m@k@ch@pt@rh@@d{#1}%
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \if@at@twocolumn
+ \@nameuse{@make#1head}{#3}%
+ \else
+ \@topnewpage[\@nameuse{@make#1head}{#3}]%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@nameuse{@make#1head}{#3}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/21}{always using \cs{@afterheading}}
+% And finally the end of every outline command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@afterheading
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@t@st@nd@w@rn@m@k@ch@pt@rh@@d}
+% \changes{v3.36}{2022/03/16}{added}
+% The test and warning used inside \cs{scr@@startchapter}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@ge{3.36}%
+ \newcommand*{\scr@t@st@nd@w@rn@m@k@ch@pt@rh@@d}[1]{%
+ \Ifstr{#1}{chapter}{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\reserved@a{\scr@makechapterhead{chapter}}%
+ \ifx\@makechapterhead\reserved@a\else
+ \ClassWarningNoLine{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ Redefinition of \string\@makechapterhead\space detected.\MessageBreak
+ Note: KOMA-Script does use styles for commands like\MessageBreak
+ \string\chapter. Currently it internally still provides and\MessageBreak
+ uses \string\@makechapterhead, but a completely different\MessageBreak
+ definition compared to the standard classes.\MessageBreak
+ So redefining or using internal \string\@makechapterhead\MessageBreak
+ by users or package authors may already break\MessageBreak
+ KOMA-Script and will not work with a coming version,\MessageBreak
+ that will remove this deprecated code}%
+ \let\scr@t@st@nd@w@rn@m@k@ch@pt@rh@@d\@gobbble
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ }{}%
+ }
+\else
+ \let\scr@t@st@nd@w@rn@m@k@ch@pt@rh@@d\@gobble
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@t@st@nd@w@rn@m@k@ch@pt@rh@@d
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@@startchapter
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@@startschapter}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{added}
+% The macro
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{scr@@startschapter}\marg{chapter command name}\marg{chapter heading}
+% \end{quote}
+% is now part of the style \texttt{chapter}. However, the main parts
+% of the code are from the original definition of \cs{@schapter}. Therefore it
+% has the mandatory argument of a star variant of, i.e., \cs{chapter} but an
+% additional first argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@@startschapter}[2]{%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/branch/star/#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Some users don't learn to use \cs{addchapter} for not numbered parts with
+% entry to the table of contents but insist in using
+% \cs{addcontentsline}. Despite this should not be used, because at least
+% \cs{addchaptertocentry} should be used, we tolerate this by using our
+% \pkg{hyperref} hook.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] I don't understand why \pkg{hyperref} uses a group here and
+% locally sets \cs{@mkboth} to \cs{@gobbletwo}. However, I've copied this.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+ \hy@insteadofrefstepcounter{#1}%
+ \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Setting the heading itself is more or less a call of \cs{@makes\meta{command
+% name}head}.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Using \cs{scr@makeschapterhead}\marg{command name} would be the
+% better solution. However in this case, every redefinition of
+% \cs{@makeschapterhead} would be ignored. So currently we support such
+% deprecated redefinition of internal macro \cs{@makeschapterhead} for
+% \cs{chapter}. But this will be changed in future.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \scr@t@st@nd@w@rn@m@ks@ch@pt@rh@@d{#1}%
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \if@at@twocolumn
+ \@nameuse{@makes#1head}{#2}%
+ \else
+ \@topnewpage[\@nameuse{@makes#1head}{#2}]%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@nameuse{@makes#1head}{#2}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/21}{always using \cs{@afterheading}}
+% And finally the end of every outline command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@afterheading
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@t@st@nd@w@rn@m@ks@ch@pt@rh@@d}
+% \changes{v3.36}{2022/03/16}{added}
+% The test and warning used inside \cs{scr@@startschapter}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@ge{3.36}%
+ \newcommand*{\scr@t@st@nd@w@rn@m@ks@ch@pt@rh@@d}[1]{%
+ \Ifstr{#1}{chapter}{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\reserved@a{\scr@makeschapterhead{chapter}}%
+ \ifx\@makeschapterhead\reserved@a\else
+ \ClassWarningNoLine{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ Redefinition of \string\@makeschapterhead\space detected.\MessageBreak
+ Note: KOMA-Script does use styles for commands like\MessageBreak
+ \string\chapter. Currently it internally still provides and\MessageBreak
+ uses \string\@makeschapterhead, but a completely different\MessageBreak
+ definition compared to the standard classes.\MessageBreak
+ So redefining or using internal \string\@makeschapterhead\MessageBreak
+ by users or package authors may already break\MessageBreak
+ KOMA-Script and will not work with a coming version,\MessageBreak
+ that will remove this deprecated code}%
+ \let\scr@t@st@nd@w@rn@m@ks@ch@pt@rh@@d\@gobble
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ }{}%
+ }
+\else
+ \let\scr@t@st@nd@w@rn@m@ks@ch@pt@rh@@d\@gobble
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@t@st@nd@w@rn@m@ks@ch@pt@rh@@d
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@@startschapter
+%
+%% \begin{macro}{\@at@twocolumntrue,\@at@twocolumnfalse,\if@at@twocolumn}
+% \changes{v2.7b}{2001/01/05}{added}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@topnewpage}
+% \changes{v2.7b}{2001/01/05}{added}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/27}{braces fixed}
+% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage}
+% \changes{v2.7b}{2001/01/05}{added}
+% \changes{v2.7g}{2001/04/17}{missing \cs{long} added}
+% In the code above we use \cs{if@at@twocolumn} to detect, if we already
+% inside the optional argument of \cs{twocolumn}. A clean definition of this
+% feature would redefine \LaTeX{} command \cs{twocolumn}. Here we use the ugly
+% hack to redefine the internal macro \cs{@topnewpage} of the \LaTeX{} kernel
+% instead. This macro is used to print the optional argument. So we can add
+% switching on and of the boolean switch before and after it. With this,
+% packages can simply use chapter commands also inside the optional argument
+% of \cs{twocolumn} instead of need to use an internal command like
+% \cs{@makechapterhead}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@at@twocolumn
+\newcommand*\scr@topnewpage{}
+\let\scr@topnewpage\@topnewpage
+\long\def\@topnewpage[#1]{%
+ \@at@twocolumntrue\scr@topnewpage[{#1}]\@at@twocolumnfalse
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \@topnewpage
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@topnewpage
+% \end{macro}^^A \if@at@twocolumn
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@makechapterhead}
+% \changes{v2.7b}{2001/01/05}{support for chapter preamble}
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{support for different kinds of preambles}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{\cs{nobreak} removed}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{added}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@@makechapterhead}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{added}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/04/18}{\cs{raggedsection} also for the prefix}
+% \changes{v2.9p}{2003/06/28}{setting \cs{parfillskip} to \cs{fill}}
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/02}{distance after the prefix line only if prefix line}
+% \changes{v2.97b}{2007/03/09}{\cs{endgraf} fixed}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/20}{re-implementation}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{\cs{raggedchapter} replaced by \cs{raggedsection}}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{using \cs{usefontofkomafont} for initial font
+% changed}
+% Macros
+% \begin{quote}\raggedright
+% \cs{scr@makechapterhead}\marg{chapter command name}\marg{heading}\\
+% \cs{scr@@makechapterhead}\marg{chapter command name}\marg{heading}
+% \end{quote}
+% are used inside the definition of style \texttt{chapter} and replace
+% \cs{@makechapterhead} resp. \cs{@@makechapterhead} there. So they have one
+% more argument than \cs{@makechapterhead} of the standard classes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@makechapterhead}[2]{%
+ \use@chapter@o@preamble{#1}%
+ \@nameuse{@@make#1head}{#2}%
+ \use@preamble{#1@u}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\scr@@makechapterhead}[2]{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/21}{\cs{@afterindentrue} if \opt{beforeskip} is
+% positive}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{using \opt{afterindent}}
+% Depending on \opt{afterindent} we set \cs{if@afterindent} and set the
+% initial vertical skip using \cs{@tempskipa} and \cs{chapterheadstartvskip}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempskipa=\glueexpr \csname scr@#1@beforeskip\endcsname\relax\relax
+ \csname scr@#1@afterindent\endcsname
+ {\@afterindenttrue}{\@afterindentfalse}{%
+ \ifdim\@tempskipa<\z@\@tempskipa-\@tempskipa\else
+ \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@ge{3.22}\@afterindenttrue\fi
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \chapterheadstartvskip
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/02}{using \cs{chapterlinesformat} and
+% \cs{chapterlineswithprefixformat}}
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/02}{using font element \fnt{disposition} instead of
+% \cs{sectfont}}
+% \changes{v3.19a}{2015/10/03}{missing local definition of \cs{IfUseNumber}
+% added}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/23}{setting \cs{parfillskip} to \texttt{\cs{z@} plus
+% 1fil}}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{setting of \cs{parindent} and \cs{parfillskip}
+% moved}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{\cs{ExecuteDoHook} added}
+% \changes{v3.28}{2019/11/19}{\cs{ifnumbered} renamed to
+% \cs{Ifnumbered}}
+% For the heading itself a group is used. Using group braces instead of
+% \cs{begingroup} makes it possible to do a very ugly hack inside a
+% redefinition of \cs{chapterheadstartvskip}. Nevertheless, such hacks are not
+% recommended.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {%
+ \def\IfUseNumber{\Ifnumbered{#1}}%
+%<book> \if@mainmatter\else\let\IfUseNumber\@secondoftwo\fi
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/begingroup/#1}%
+ \if@chapterprefix
+ \let\IfUsePrefixLine\@firstoftwo
+ \else
+ \let\IfUsePrefixLine\@secondoftwo
+ \fi
+ \setlength{\parindent}{\z@}\setlength{\parfillskip}{\z@ plus 1fil}%
+ \normalfont\usekomafont{disposition}{%
+ \usekomafont{#1}{%
+ \settoheight{\@tempskipa}{%
+ {\usekomafont{#1prefix}{%
+ \vrule \@width\z@ \@height\csname scr@#1@innerskip\endcsname}}%
+ }%
+ \raggedchapter
+ \IfUseNumber{%
+ \IfUsePrefixLine{%
+ \chapterlineswithprefixformat{#1}%
+ {{\usekomafont{#1prefix}{\csname #1format\endcsname%
+ \setlength{\@tempskipa}{\csname scr@#1@innerskip\endcsname}%
+ \chapterheadmidvskip}}}%
+ {\interlinepenalty \@M#2\@@par}%
+ }{%
+ \chapterlinesformat{#1}%
+ {\csname #1format\endcsname}%
+ {\interlinepenalty \@M#2\@@par}%
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \IfUsePrefixLine{%
+ \chapterlineswithprefixformat{#1}%
+ {}%
+ {\interlinepenalty \@M#2\@@par}%
+ }{%
+ \chapterlinesformat{#1}%
+ {}%
+ {\interlinepenalty \@M#2\@@par}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/endgroup/#1}%
+ }%
+ \nobreak\par\nobreak
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/20}{no absolute value}
+% Last but not least the final skip.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] \cs{@afterheading} will be added by \cs{scr@@startchapter}.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempskipa=\glueexpr \csname scr@#1@afterskip\endcsname\relax\relax
+ \chapterheadendvskip
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@makechapterhead
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@@makechapterhead
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@makeschapterhead}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{added}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@@makeschapterhead}
+% \changes{v2.9p}{2003/06/28}{to \cs{parfillskip} to \cs{fill}}
+% \changes{v2.9q}{2004/03/24}{same braces like \cs{@@makechapterhead}}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{\cs{raggedchapter} replaced by
+% \cs{raggedsection}}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{added}
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/02}{same changes like \cs{scr@@makechapterhead}}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/23}{setting \cs{parfillskip} to \texttt{\cs{z@} plus
+% 1fil}}
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{\cs{IfUseNumber} fixed}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/20}{no absolute of \opt{afterskip}}
+% Macros
+% \begin{quote}\raggedright
+% \cs{scr@makeschapterhead}\marg{chapter command name}\marg{heading}\\
+% \cs{scr@@makeschapterhead}\marg{chapter command name}\marg{heading}
+% \end{quote}
+% are used inside the definition of style \texttt{chapter} and replace
+% \cs{@makeschapterhead} resp. \cs{@@makeschapterhead} there. So they have one
+% more argument than \cs{@makeschapterhead} of the standard classes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@makeschapterhead}[2]{%
+ \use@chapter@o@preamble{#1}%
+ \@nameuse{@@makes#1head}{#2}%
+ \use@preamble{#1@u}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\scr@@makeschapterhead}[2]{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/21}{\cs{@afterindentrue} if positive
+% \opt{beforeskip}}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{supporting \opt{afterindent}}
+% This is a simplified version of \cs{scr@@makechapterhead}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempskipa=\glueexpr \csname scr@#1@beforeskip\endcsname\relax\relax
+ \csname scr@#1@afterindent\endcsname
+ {\@afterindenttrue}{\@afterindentfalse}{%
+ \ifdim\@tempskipa<\z@\@tempskipa-\@tempskipa\else
+ \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@ge{3.22}\@afterindenttrue\fi
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \chapterheadstartvskip
+ {%
+ \let\IfUseNumber\@secondoftwo
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/begingroup/#1}%
+ \if@chapterprefix
+ \let\IfUsePrefixLine\@firstoftwo
+ \else
+ \let\IfUsePrefixLine\@secondoftwo
+ \fi
+ \setlength{\parindent}{\z@}\setlength{\parfillskip}{\z@ plus 1fil}%
+ \normalfont\usekomafont{disposition}{%
+ \usekomafont{#1}{%
+ \raggedchapter
+ \IfUsePrefixLine{%
+ \chapterlineswithprefixformat{#1}%
+ {}%
+ {\interlinepenalty \@M#2\@@par}%
+ }{%
+ \chapterlinesformat{#1}%
+ {}%
+ {\interlinepenalty \@M#2\@@par}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/endgroup/#1}%
+ }%
+ \nobreak\par\nobreak
+ \@tempskipa=\glueexpr \csname scr@#1@afterskip\endcsname\relax\relax
+ \chapterheadendvskip
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@@makeschapterhead
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@makeschapterhead
+%
+% \begin{command}{\chapterlinesformat,\chapterlineswithprefixformat}
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/02}{added}
+% Commands
+% \begin{quote}\raggedright
+% \cs{chapterlinesformat}\marg{command name}\marg{number}\marg{text}\\
+% \cs{chapterlineswithprefixformat}\marg{command name}\marg{number}\marg{text}
+% \end{quote}
+% are used to print a chapter heading either a free standing one or a free
+% stranding one with prefix line. \meta{number} is the completely formatted
+% prefix line inclusive the vertical distance below. The \meta{text} is the
+% text of the heading also formatted and with final \cs{@@par}. But if the
+% user used more paragraphs than this is final one, the user is responsible to
+% prevent page breaks!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\chapterlinesformat}[3]{%
+ \@hangfrom{#2}{#3}%
+}
+\newcommand{\chapterlineswithprefixformat}[3]{%
+ #2#3%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \chapterlinesformat,\chapterlineswithprefixformat
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\use@chapter@o@preamble}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/08}{distances adapted}
+% \changes{v3.15a}{2015/02/02}{avoiding \texttt{overfull \cs{vbox}}}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{using command depending distances and warnings}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{has an argument and prints the preamble of the
+% command instead of the style}
+% Used by \cs{scr@makechapterhead} and \cs{scr@makeschapterhead} to set the
+% preamble above chapter headings.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\use@chapter@o@preamble}[1]{%
+ {%
+ \settoheight{\@tempdima}{%
+ \@tempskipa=\glueexpr \csname scr@#1@beforeskip\endcsname\relax\relax
+ \ifdim\@tempskipa<\z@\@tempskipa-\@tempskipa\fi
+ \vbox{\chapterheadstartvskip}%
+ }%
+ \settodepth{\@tempdimb}{%
+ \@tempskipa=\glueexpr \csname scr@#1@beforeskip\endcsname\relax\relax
+ \ifdim\@tempskipa<\z@\@tempskipa-\@tempskipa\fi
+ \vbox{\chapterheadstartvskip}%
+ }%
+ \addtolength{\@tempdima}{\@tempdimb}%
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{%
+ \use@preamble{#1@o}%
+ }%
+ \setlength{\@tempdimb}{\ht0}%
+ \addtolength{\@tempdimb}{\dp0}%
+ \vbox to \z@{%
+ \vskip-\baselineskip
+ \vbox to \@tempdima{%
+ \vfill
+ \box\z@
+ }%
+ \vss
+ }\vskip-\parskip\vskip-\baselineskip
+ \ifdim \@tempdimb>\@tempdima%
+ \addtolength{\@tempdimb}{-\@tempdima}%
+ \ifdim\@tempdimb<\vfuzz
+ \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ preamble before #1 is \the\@tempdimb\space to high.\MessageBreak
+ Tolerated without warning because of\MessageBreak
+ \string\vfuzz\space = \the\vfuzz\space >= \the\@tempdimb
+ }%
+ \else
+ \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ preamble before #1 is \the\@tempdimb\space to high.\MessageBreak
+ To avoid the overfull \string\vbox\space you may
+ change\MessageBreak
+ the `beforeskip' value using
+ \string\RedeclareSectionCommand\MessageBreak
+ at the preamble of your document.\MessageBreak
+ You may also change \string\setchapterpreamble\MessageBreak
+ before the command, which generates the message
+ about\MessageBreak
+ an overfull \string\vbox
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \fi%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \use@chapter@o@preamble
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@startchapter
+%
+% \begin{command}{\addchaptertocentry}
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/01}{added}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{support for \cs{if@chaptertolists}}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{using\cs{addxcontentsline}}
+% \changes{v3.28}{2019/11/19}{\cs{iftocfeature} replaced by
+% \cs{Iftocfeature}}
+% We do not use \cs{addcontentsline} directly for the entries to the table of
+% contents. Using
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{addchaptertocentry}\marg{number}\marg{text}
+% \end{quote}
+% allows easy manipulation of such entries and additional actions. If the
+% \meta{number} is completely empty no number should be used. Internally the
+% generic \cs{addtocentrydefault} it used, which uses \cs{nonumberline}
+% instead of \cs{numberline} in this case. See \file{scrkernel-listsof.dtx}
+% for more information.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Here we also do the entries to other directories. But we have
+% also code for this in \cs{scr@@startchapter} at least for the vertical
+% space. Shouldn't we combine both places to one place? And shouldn't this
+% be done here only, because of handling of user calls of
+% \cs{addchaptertocentry}?
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\addchaptertocentry}[2]{%
+ \addtocentrydefault{chapter}{#1}{#2}%
+ \if@chaptertolists
+ \doforeachtocfile{%
+ \Iftocfeature{\@currext}{chapteratlist}{%
+ \addxcontentsline{\@currext}{chapteratlist}[{#1}]{#2}%
+ }{}%
+ }%
+ \@ifundefined{float@addtolists}{}{\scr@float@addtolists@warning}%
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \addchaptertocentry
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chapter,\@makechapterhead,\@@makechapterhead,
+% \@schapter,\@makeschapterhead,\@@makeschapterhead}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{indirect by \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}
+% \begin{command}{\setchapterpreamble}
+% \changes{v2.7b}{2001/01/05}{added}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{indirect by \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter@u@preamble,\chapter@o@preamble}
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{added}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{indirect by \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}
+% All these commands and macros are not defined explicitly but by using
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} later. See also
+% \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command} and \cs{setchapterpreamble}.
+% \end{macro}^^A \chapter@u@preamble,\chapter@o@preamble
+% \end{command}^^A \setchapterpreamble
+% \end{macro}^^A \@chapter … \@@makeschapterhead
+%
+% \begin{command}{\addchap}
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/08/10}{\cs{sectdef} replaced by h \cs{secdef}}
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/08/10}{\cs{addcontensline} replaced by
+% \cs{addcontentsline}}
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/08/10}{\cs{@makechapterhead} replaced by
+% \cs{@makeschapterhead}}
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/08/10}{\cs{afterheadings} replaced by
+% \cs{@afterheading}}
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1994/10/29}{argument of \cs{chaptermark} removed from
+% \cls*{scrbook}}
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/10/12}{several \cs{markboth} replaced by
+% \cs{sectionmark}}
+% \changes{v2.2b}{1995/03/20}{several \cs{chaptermark} replaced by
+% \cs{@mkboth}}
+% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{using \cs{chapterpagestyle}}
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/01}{using \cs{addchaptertocentry}}
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{extended optional argument}
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{using \cs{SecDef}}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{redefinition}
+% \begin{macro}{\@addchap}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/02/26}{using \cs{addchapmark}}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/20}{expanding \cs{scr@ds@head} in \cs{addchapmark}}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{redefinition}
+% \begin{macro}{\@saddchap}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/02/26}{using \cs{addchapmark}}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{redefinition}
+% Since \KOMAScript{} 3.18 using
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{addchap}\oarg{head or ToC entry}\marg{heading}
+% \end{quote}
+% is very similar to
+% |\chapter[nonumber=true,…]{…}| but also works if the extended optional
+% argument is not activated. And
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{addchap*}\marg{heading}
+% \end{quote}
+% is just a \cs{chapter*}\marg{heading} with additional |\addchapmark{}| to
+% empty the running head.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] Because of simply manipulating \cnt{secnumdepth} this should
+% also work with packages like \pkg{hyperref} as long as they support
+% chapters without numbering.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\addchap{%
+ \SecDef\@addchap\@saddchap
+}%
+\newcommand*{\@addchap}{}%
+\long\def\@addchap[#1]#2{%
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \unexpanded{%
+ \chapter[{#1}]{#2}%
+ \c@secnumdepth=
+ }\the\c@secnumdepth\relax
+ }%
+ \c@secnumdepth=\numexpr \chapternumdepth-1\relax
+ \reserved@a
+}
+\newcommand{\@saddchap}[1]{%
+ \chapter*{#1}%
+ \addchapmark{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.7e}{2001/04/16}{braces fixed}
+% \changes{v2.7f}{2001/04/17}{braces fixed}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{using \cs{AfterPackage} to test for
+% \pkg{hyperref} version}
+% \changes{v3.27a}{2019/11/11}{warning fixed}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Unfortunately \pkg{hyperref} until version 6.71a has a big fat
+% bug. It redefines the internal \KOMAScript{} macro \cs{@addchap} without
+% testing the definition. From version 6.71b this is done only, if a very
+% old \KOMAScript{} is used. However, I would prefer removing all such code
+% from \pkg{hyperref}. Currently we warn, if such an old \pkg{hyperref} is
+% used. But this will be removed in future.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*book>
+\AfterPackage{hyperref}{%
+ \@ifpackagelater{hyperref}{2001/02/19}{}{%
+ \ClassWarningNoLine{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ You are using an old version of the hyperref package!\MessageBreak%
+ This version has a buggy hack in many drivers,\MessageBreak%
+ causing \string\addchap\space to behave strangely.\MessageBreak%
+ Please update hyperref to at least version 6.71b%
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+%</book>
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \@saddchap
+% \end{macro}^^A \@addchap
+% \end{command}^^A \addchap
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter}
+% \changes{v2.9k}{2003/01/02}{supporting option \opt{tocleft}}
+% \changes{v2.96b}{2006/11/30}{prevent page break between chapter entry and
+% parent}
+% \changes{v2.96b}{2006/11/30}{prevent page break between chapter entry and
+% child}
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{\cs{sectfont} replaced by font element
+% \fnt{chapterentry}}
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{using font element
+% \fnt{chapterentrypagenumber}}
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{re-implemented to support left aligned entries}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/22}{using \cs{chaptertocdepth} and
+% \cs{scr@chapter@tocnumwidth}}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{initial skip with \cs{addvspace} instead of
+% \cs{vskip}}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/06}{re-implemented using ToC styles}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@chapter@tocindent}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/02}{added}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{indirect definition by \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/06}{really used}
+% \end{macro}^^A \scr@chapter@tocindent
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@chapter@tocnumwidth}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/02}{added}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{indirect definition by \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{option}{chapterentrydots}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{added}
+% Option
+% \begin{quote}
+% \opt{chapterentrydots=\meta{boolean}}
+% \end{quote}
+% is the main difference of ToC entry style \texttt{chapter} to ToC entry
+% style \texttt{tocline}. It activates the dots between the entry text and the
+% page number.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] This should be moved to \file{scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx}.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*option>
+\KOMA@ifkey{chapterentrydots}{@chapterentrywithdots}
+%</option>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{option}^^A chapterentrydots
+% \begin{command}{\raggedchapterentry}
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{added}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/02/23}{removed}
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/06}{see \file{scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx},
+% style \texttt{tocline}, option \opt{raggedentrytext}}
+% The initial setting of option \opt{raggedtext} of chapter ToC entry style
+% \texttt{tocline} resp. \texttt{chapter}.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Do we really need this definition? Every definition but
+% \cs{raggedright} results in justified text. So not defining it would be
+% almost the same. It just would not reserve the macro. But this could be
+% done in \file{scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx}.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\raggedchapterentry}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \raggedchapterentry
+% \end{macro}^^A \l@chapter
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@chapteratlist}
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{added}
+% This is used for chapter entries to other directories by the table of
+% contents. By default it uses \cs{l@chapter}. But users can redefine it
+% using, i.e., \cs{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}. However in this case they have to
+% setup all the attributes/options on their own.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\l@chapteratlist}{\l@chapter}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \l@chapteratlist
+%
+% \begin{counter}{chapter}
+% \begin{command}{\thechapter}
+% \begin{command}{\chapterformat}
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{auto dot feature}
+% \changes{v2.7}{2000/01/03}{white space replaced by \cs{enskip}}
+% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{\cs{chapappifprefix} added}
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/19}{\cs{chapappifprefix} replaced by
+% \cs{chapappifchapterprefix}}
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/02}{\cs{mbox} added}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/08}{\cs{enskip} not in prefix line mode}
+% \begin{command}{\chaptermarkformat}
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{space after chapter number increased}
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{auto dot feature}
+% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{\cs{chapappifprefix} added}
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/19}{\cs{chapappifprefix} replaced by
+% \cs{chapappifchapterprefix}}
+% \changes{v3.03a}{2009/04/03}{tilde replaced by \cs{nobreakspace} for better
+% \pkg{babel-spanish} support}
+% The counter would also be defined by \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}. But because
+% of handling \cs{frontmatter} and \cs{backmatter} and prefix lines we cannot
+% use the default definition of the formatting. So we define it already before
+% calling \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} for \cs{chapter}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{chapter}
+\renewcommand*{\thechapter}{\@arabic\c@chapter}
+\newcommand*{\chapterformat}{%
+ \mbox{\chapappifchapterprefix{\nobreakspace}\thechapter\autodot
+ \IfUsePrefixLine{}{\enskip}}%
+}
+\newcommand*\chaptermarkformat{\chapappifchapterprefix{\ }%
+ \thechapter\autodot\enskip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \chaptermarkformat
+% \end{command}^^A \chapterformat
+% \end{command}^^A \thechapter
+% \end{counter}^^A chapter
+%
+%
+% \begin{command}{\chaptername}
+% \changes{v3.36}{2022/03/15}{explicit definition for English languages}
+% The name of a chapter, e.g., used for the prefix line and maybe for the ToC
+% entry.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\chaptername{Chapter}
+\providecaptionname{american,australian,british,canadian,english,newzealand,%
+ UKenglish,ukenglish,USenglish,usenglish}\chaptername{Chapter}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \chaptername
+%
+%
+% \begin{command}{\appendixname}
+% \changes{v3.36}{2022/03/15}{explicit definition for English languages}
+% The same for appendix chapters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\appendixname{Appendix}
+\providecaptionname{american,australian,british,canadian,english,newzealand,%
+ UKenglish,ukenglish,USenglish,usenglish}\appendixname{Appendix}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \appendixname
+%
+%
+% \begin{command}{\chapappifprefix}
+% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{added}
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/19}{deprecated}
+% \changes{v3.36}{2022/03/18}{removed}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] Command \cs{chapappifprefix} has been removed in \KOMAScript{}
+% v3.36, because it is deprecated from \KOMAScript{} v2.8o and there never has
+% been a compatibility switch for versions before \KOMAScript{} v2.9.
+% \end{description}
+% \end{command}^^A \chapappifprefix
+%
+%
+% \begin{command}{\chapappifchapterprefix}
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/19}{added}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/09}{using \cs{IfChapterUsePrefixLine}}
+% \begin{command}{\IfChapterUsesPrefixLine}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/09}{added}
+% \begin{command}{\chapapp}
+% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{added}
+% \begin{macro}{\@chapapp}
+% The \LaTeX{} standard classes provide an internal macro \cs{@chapapp} that
+% is either \cs{chaptername} or \cs{appendixname} depending on whether we are
+% inside or outside the appendix. For compatibility with lots of packages
+% \KOMAScript{} does provide this too. But for the user level this is
+% cumbersome. So \KOMAScript{} does also provide a \emph{read only specified}
+% user command \cs{chapapp}. \KOMAScript{} itself uses \cs{chapapp} inside
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{chapappifchapterprefix}\marg{then string}
+% \end{quote}
+% that outputs \cs{then string} prefixed by \cs{chapapp} only, if
+% \opt{chapterprefix} (resp. \opt{headings=twolinechapter}) has been activated
+% and therefore a chapter prefix line has to be used. A more general version
+% \cs{chapterifchapterprefix} is
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{IfChapterUsesPrefixLine}\marg{then code}\marg{else code}
+% \end{quote}
+% that executes \cs{then code} if a chapter prefix line has to be used and
+% \cs{else code} otherwise (both without extra prefix).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\chapappifchapterprefix}[1]{%
+ \IfChapterUsesPrefixLine{\chapapp#1}{}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\IfChapterUsesPrefixLine}{%
+ \if@chapterprefix\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi
+}
+\newcommand*{\chapapp}{\@chapapp}
+\newcommand*\@chapapp{\chaptername}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \@chapapp
+% \end{command}^^A \chapapp
+% \end{command}^^A \IfChapterUsePrefixLine
+% \end{command}^^A \chapappifchapterprefix
+%
+%
+% \begin{command}{\chaptermark}
+% Before selecting a page style with automatic running head, \cs{chapter}
+% should simply not change the left or right mark.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Do we really need this or would the later
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} be enough to do the initial definition?
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\chaptermark[1]{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}
+%
+% \begin{command}{\addchapmark}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/26}{added}
+% \cs{addchap} and marks for running heads are a little bit more
+% complicated. Currently we are using a local redefinition of
+% \cs{if@mainmatter} and setting of \cnt{secnumdept} to switch of numbering
+% and then using \cs{chaptermark}. So the \cs{chaptermark} definition should
+% always respect at least one of these settings.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] The ToDo note at \cs{chaptermark} is not relevant for this
+% definition.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\addchapmark[1]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \expandafter\let\csname if@mainmatter\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname iffalse\endcsname
+ \c@secnumdepth=\numexpr \chapternumdepth-1\relax
+ \chaptermark{#1}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \addchapmark
+%
+%
+% \begin{command}{\raggedchapter}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{added}
+% Style \texttt{chapter} does not use \cs{raggedsection} but
+% \cs{raggedchapter}. However, the initial value is \cs{raggedsection}, so a
+% change of \cs{raggedsection} would also change the initial behave of
+% \cs{raggedchapter}. Nevertheless the alignment of chapters in independent
+% from the alignment of sections, if wanted.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\raggedchapter}{\raggedsection}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}
+%
+%
+% \begin{fontelement}{chapterentry}
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{added}
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/09}{font element \fnt{sectioning} replaced by
+% \fnt{disposition}}
+% \cs{chapter} entries to the table of contents initially using
+% \fnt{disposition}, the basic font of all outlines.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newkomafont{chapterentry}{\usekomafont{disposition}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{fontelement}
+%
+% \begin{fontelement}{chapterentrypagenumber}
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{added}
+% The page number of \cs{chapter} entries to the table of contents is
+% initially the same as the entry at whole.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newkomafont{chapterentrypagenumber}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{fontelement}
+%
+% \begin{fontelement}{chapterentrydots}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{added}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/28}{\cs{normalfont} removed}
+% If the optional dots for \cs{chapter} entries to the table of contents are
+% used, we can change the font of the dots also. It is used for the
+% \texttt{linefill} of \pkg*{tocbasic} ToC entry style \texttt{chapter}, that
+% uses ToC entry style \texttt{tocline} where the line filler is always
+% prefixed by \cs{normalfont}\cs{normalsize}. So the setting is relative to
+% this. The color is relative to the color of \fnt{chapterentry}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newkomafont{chapterentrydots}{}
+%</body>
+%</book|report>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{fontelement}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Section, subsections and more}
+%
+% The outline levels of sections, subsections, subsubsection, paragraphs and
+% subparagraphs are all very similar. There are only some special treatments
+% of sections with \cls*{scrartcl}, because there \cs{section} is a high-level
+% command.
+%
+% \begin{fontelement}{section,subsection,subsubsection,
+% paragraph,subparagraph}
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{added}
+% Definition of the font elements used by \cs{section}, \cs{subsection},
+% \cs{subsubsection}, \cs{paragraph} and \cs{subparagraph}. The settings are
+% done by option \texttt{headings} later. Everything is prepared before this
+% option is used the first time. The definition of the font element is done
+% manually to stay compatible with old \KOMAScript{} versions using another
+% internal macro than the default of \cs{newkomafont}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*prepare>
+\newcommand*{\size@section}{}
+\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@section}{\size@section}
+\newcommand*{\size@subsection}{}
+\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@subsection}{\size@subsection}
+\newcommand*{\size@subsubsection}{}
+\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@subsubsection}{\size@subsubsection}
+\newcommand*{\size@paragraph}{}
+\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@paragraph}{\size@paragraph}
+\newcommand*{\size@subparagraph}{}
+\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@subparagraph}{\size@subparagraph}
+%</prepare>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{fontelement}^^A section … subparagraph
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
+% \changes{v2.9k}{2003/01/02}{supporting option \opt{tocleft}}
+% \changes{v2.96b}{2006/11/30}{preventing page break between section entry and
+% parent}
+% \changes{v2.96b}{2006/11/30}{preventing page break between section entry and
+% child}
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{\cs{sectfont} replaced by font element
+% \fnt{sectionentry}}
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{using font element
+% \fnt{sectionentrypagenumber}}
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{re-implemented to support left aligned entries}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{using \cs{sectiontocdepth},
+% \cs{scr@section@tocindent} and \cs{scr@section@tocnumwidth}}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/06}{re-implemented using ToC styles}
+% \begin{option}{sectionentrydots}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{added}
+% With \cls*{scrartcl} option
+% \begin{quote}
+% \opt{sectionentrydots=\meta{boolean}}
+% \end{quote}
+% is the main difference of ToC entry style \texttt{section} to ToC entry
+% style \texttt{tocline}. It activates the dots between the entry text and the
+% page number.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] This should be moved to \file{scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx}.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*article>
+%<*option>
+\KOMA@ifkey{sectionentrydots}{@sectionentrywithdots}
+%</option>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{option}^^A sectionentrydots
+% \begin{command}{\raggedsectionentry}
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{added}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/02/23}{removed}
+% The initial setting of option \opt{raggedtext} of section ToC entry style
+% \texttt{tocline} resp. \texttt{section}.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Do we really need this definition? Every definition but
+% \cs{raggedright} results in justified text. So not defining it would be
+% almost the same. It just would not reserve the macro. But this could be
+% done in \file{scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx}.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\raggedsectionentry}{}
+%</body>
+%</article>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \raggedsectionentry
+% \end{macro}^^A \l@section
+%
+%
+% \begin{command}{\addsec}
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/10/12}{several \cs{markboth} replaced by
+% \cs{sectionmark}}
+% \changes{v2.2b}{1995/03/20}{\cs{sectionmark} replaced by \cs{@mkboth}}
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{also available with \cls*{scrbook} and
+% \cls*{scrreprt}}
+% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{\cs{section*} moved because of page breaks in
+% the table of contents}
+% \changes{v2.5d}{1998/01/03}{\cs{@mkboth} replaced by conditional
+% \cs{markright}}
+% \changes{v2.7a}{2001/01/04}{supporting \pkg{hyperref}}
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{using \cs{SecDef}}
+% \begin{macro}{\@addsec}
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{using \cs{addsectiontocentry}}
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{extended optional argument}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/02/26}{using \cs{addsecmark}}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{redefinition}
+% \begin{macro}{\@saddsec}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/02/26}{using \cs{addsecmark}}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/20}{expanding \cs{scr@ds@head} in \cs{addsecmark}}
+% Since \KOMAScript{} 3.18 using
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{addsec}\oarg{head or ToC entry}\marg{heading}
+% \end{quote}
+% is very similar to
+% |\section[nonumber=true,…]{…}| but also works if the extended optional
+% argument is not activated. And
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{addsec*}\marg{heading}
+% \end{quote}
+% is just a \cs{section*}\marg{heading} with additional |\addsecmark{}| to
+% empty the running head.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] Because of simply manipulating \cnt{secnumdepth} this should
+% also work with packages like \pkg{hyperref} as long as they support
+% sections without numbering.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand\addsec{\SecDef\@addsec\@saddsec}
+\newcommand*{\@addsec}{}
+\def\@addsec[#1]#2{%
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \unexpanded{%
+ \section[{#1}]{#2}%
+ \c@secnumdepth=
+ }\the\c@secnumdepth\relax
+ }%
+ \c@secnumdepth=\numexpr \sectionnumdepth-1\relax
+ \reserved@a
+}
+\newcommand*{\@saddsec}[1]{%
+ \section*{#1}\addsecmark{}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \@saddsec
+% \end{macro}^^A \@addsec
+% \end{command}^^A \addsec
+%
+%
+% \begin{command}{\minisec}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/28}{\cs{nobreak} after \cs{sectfont} added}
+% \changes{v2.9o}{2003/01/31}{\cs{nobreak} after group end}
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/30}{initial value of \cs{parfillskip} depending on
+% \opt{version}}
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{not needed \cs{nobreak} removed}
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/08/07}{handling of distances of immediate following
+% headings like \cs{@startsection}}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/05/14}{missing \cs{interlinepenalty}\cs{@M} added}
+% \begin{fontelement}{minisec}
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{using font element \fnt{minisec}}
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{missing \cs{nobreak} added}
+% \cs{minisec} is a very special additional outline of \KOMAScript. It is
+% always free standing but without numbering. Something like
+% \cs{sectionlinesformat} is not supported currently. Also entries to the
+% table of contents or marks for an automatic running head are not
+% supported. However a dedicated font element is provided.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newkomafont{minisec}{}
+\newcommand\minisec[1]{%
+ \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@lt{3.13a}\relax
+ \@afterindentfalse \vskip 1.5ex
+ \else
+ \if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi
+ \par
+ \@afterindentfalse
+ \if@nobreak
+ \everypar{}%
+ \else
+ \addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace{1.5ex}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ {\parindent \z@
+ \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@gt{2.96}\relax
+ \setlength{\parfillskip}{\z@ plus 1fil}\fi
+ \raggedsection\normalfont\sectfont\nobreak
+ \usekomafont{minisec}{\nobreak\interlinepenalty \@M #1\par\nobreak}%
+ }\nobreak
+ \@afterheading
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{fontelement}^^A minisec
+% \end{command}^^A \minisec
+%
+%
+% \begin{command}{\addsectiontocentry,\addsubsectiontocentry,
+% \addsubsubsectiontocentry,
+% \addparagraphtocentry,\addsubparagraphtocentry}
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{added}
+% We do not use \cs{addcontentsline} directly for the entries to the table of
+% contents. Using
+% \begin{quote}\raggedright
+% \cs{addsectiontocentry}\marg{number}\marg{text}\\
+% \cs{addsubsectiontocentry}\marg{number}\marg{text}\\
+% \cs{addsubsubsectiontocentry}\marg{number}\marg{text}\\
+% \cs{addparagraphtocentry}\marg{number}\marg{text}\\
+% \cs{addsubparagraphtocentry}\marg{number}\marg{text}\\
+% \end{quote}
+% allows easy manipulation of such entries and additional actions. If the
+% \meta{number} is completely empty no number should be used. Internally the
+% generic \cs{addtocentrydefault} it used, which uses \cs{nonumberline}
+% instead of \cs{numberline} in this case. See \file{scrkernel-listsof.dtx}
+% for more information.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Should this be moved to \file{scrkernel-listsof.dtx} or even to
+% \file{scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx}?
+% \item[ToDo:] Are these really needed or would the implicit definition by the
+% later \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} be enough as it is already used for
+% \cs{addsubsubsectiontocentry}?
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\addsectiontocentry}[2]{%
+ \addtocentrydefault{section}{#1}{#2}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\addsubsectiontocentry}[2]{%
+ \addtocentrydefault{subsection}{#1}{#2}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\addparagraphtocentry}[2]{%
+ \addtocentrydefault{paragraph}{#1}{#2}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\addsubparagraphtocentry}[2]{%
+ \addtocentrydefault{subparagraph}{#1}{#2}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}
+%
+%
+% \begin{counter}{section}
+% \begin{command}{\thesection}
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/23}{chapter number prefix only in main matter}
+% \changes{v3.03b}{2009/06/09}{\cs{relax} replaced by white space for better
+% support of \pkg{hyperref}}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/06/26}{using \cs{scr@v@is@gt}}
+% \begin{command}{\sectionmarkformat}
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{space after number increased}
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{auto dot feature}
+% \begin{counter}{subsection}
+% \begin{command}{\thesubsection}
+% \begin{command}{\subsectionmarkformat}
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{space after number increased}
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{auto dot feature}
+% \begin{counter}{subsubsection}
+% \begin{command}{\thesubsubsection}
+% \begin{counter}{paragraph}
+% \begin{command}{\theparagraph}
+% \begin{counter}{subparagraph}
+% \begin{command}{\thesubparagraph}
+% The counter would also be defined by \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}. But because
+% of handling \cs{frontmatter} and \cs{backmatter} and prefix lines we cannot
+% use the default definition of the formatting of \cnt{section}. So we define
+% it already before calling \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} for \cs{section}.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Do we really need the explicit definition of \cnt{subsection},
+% \cnt{subsubsection}, \cnt{paragraph}, and \cnt{subparagraph} of would the
+% implicit definition by \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} be enough for these.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*book|report>
+\newcounter{section}[chapter]
+\renewcommand*\thesection{%
+%<*book>
+ \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@gt{2.97d}%
+ \if@mainmatter\thechapter.\fi
+ \else
+%</book>
+ \thechapter.%
+%<book> \fi
+ \@arabic\c@section
+}
+%</book|report>
+%<*article>
+\newcounter{section}
+\renewcommand*{\thesection}{\@arabic\c@section}
+%</article>
+\newcommand*\sectionmarkformat{\thesection\autodot\enskip}
+\newcounter{subsection}[section]
+\renewcommand*{\thesubsection}{\thesection.\@arabic\c@subsection}
+%<*article>
+\newcommand*\subsectionmarkformat{\thesubsection\autodot\enskip}
+%</article>
+\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]
+\renewcommand*{\thesubsubsection}{%
+ \thesubsection.\@arabic\c@subsubsection
+}
+\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]
+\renewcommand*{\theparagraph}{\thesubsubsection.\@arabic\c@paragraph}
+\newcounter{subparagraph}[paragraph]
+\renewcommand*{\thesubparagraph}{%
+ \theparagraph.\@arabic\c@subparagraph
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\@seccntformat}
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{CJK support extended}
+% \changes{v2.9p}{2004/01/07}{\cs{protect} added}
+% \changes{v2.97}{2007/01/24}{workaround for the ugly \cs{protect}}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/23}{using \cs{\dots format} if exists}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/31}{using \cs{protect} for \cs{\dots format}}
+% \begin{command}{\othersectionlevelsformat}
+% \changes{v2.7}{2000/01/03}{added}
+% \changes{v2.7}{2000/01/03}{\cs{quad} replaced by \cs{enskip}}
+% \changes{v2.7i}{2001/05/17}{\cs{let} replaced by \cs{def}}
+% \changes{v2.97}{2007/01/24}{three arguments instead of only one}
+% With \KOMAScript~2 \cs{othersectionlevelsformat} has had only one argument,
+% the \cs{…format} command of the level. But with there has been expansion
+% issues. So we have had to change the definition to
+% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{othersectionlevelsformat}\marg{level name}\marg{ignore
+% command}\marg{the command}
+% \end{quote}
+% Users who use or redefine \cs{othersectionlevelsformat} should always ignore
+% the \meta{ignore command}. It is used to internally handle deprecated
+% definitions of \cs{othersectionlevelsformat} with only one
+% argument. \meta{level name} is the name of the level command, e.g.,
+% |subsubsection|. \meta{the command} is the \cs{the…} command corresponding
+% with \marg{level name}. See the definition of \cs{@seccntformat} for more
+% information about the internal usage of \cs{othersectionlevelsformat}.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[ToDo:] Can we somehow change this for \KOMAScript~4 to no longer
+% support the second argument (unless a low compatibility level is used)?
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\othersectionlevelsformat}[3]{#3\autodot\enskip}
+\renewcommand*{\@seccntformat}[1]{%
+ \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@lt{3.17}\relax
+ \protect\othersectionlevelsformat{#1}{%
+ \expandafter\aftergroup\noexpand\@gobble}{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+ \else
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{#1format}{%
+ \protect\othersectionlevelsformat{#1}{%
+ \expandafter\aftergroup\noexpand\@gobble}{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+ }{\expandafter\protect\csname #1format\endcsname}%
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \othersectonlevelsformat
+% \end{macro}^^A \@seccntformat
+% \end{command}^^A \thesubparagraph
+% \end{counter}^^A subparagraph
+% \end{command}^^A \theparagraph
+% \end{counter}^^A paragraph
+% \end{command}^^A \thesubsubsection
+% \end{counter}^^A subsubsection
+% \end{command}^^A \subsectionformat
+% \end{command}^^A \thesubsection
+% \end{counter}^^A subsection
+% \end{command}^^A \sectionformat
+% \end{command}^^A \thesection
+% \end{counter}^^A section
+%
+%
+% \begin{command}{\addsecmark}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/26}{added}
+% \cs{addsec} and marks for running heads are a little bit
+% complicated. Currently we are using a local setting of \cnt{secnumdept} to
+% switch of numbering and then using \cs{sectionmark}. So the \cs{sectionmark}
+% definition should always respect \cnt{secnumdepth}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\addsecmark[1]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \c@secnumdepth=\numexpr \sectionnumdepth-1\relax
+ \sectionmark{#1}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \addsecmark
+%
+%
+% \begin{fontelement}{sectionentry}
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{added}
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/09}{font element \fnt{sectioning} replaced by
+% \fnt{disposition}}
+% With \cls*{scrartcl} \cs{section} entries to the table of contents initially
+% using \fnt{disposition}, the basic font of all outlines.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*article>
+\newkomafont{sectionentry}{\usekomafont{disposition}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{fontelement}
+%
+% \begin{fontelement}{sectionentrypagenumber}
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{added}
+% The page number of \cs{section} entries to the table of contents is
+% initially the same as the entry at whole with \cls*{scrartcl}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newkomafont{sectionentrypagenumber}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{fontelement}
+%
+% \begin{fontelement}{sectionentrydots}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{added}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/28}{\cs{normalfont} removed}
+% If the optional dots for \cs{section} entries to the table of contents are
+% used, we can change the font of the dots also. It is used for the
+% \texttt{linefill} of \pkg*{tocbasic} ToC entry style \texttt{section}, that
+% uses ToC entry style \texttt{tocline} where the line filler is always
+% prefixed by \cs{normalfont}\cs{normalsize}. So the setting is relative to
+% this. The color is relative to the color of \fnt{sectionentry}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newkomafont{sectionentrydots}{}
+%</article>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{fontelement}
+%
+%
+% \begin{command}{\partnumdepth,\chapternumdepth,
+% \sectionnumdepth,\subsectionnumdepth,\subsubsectionnumdepth,
+% \paragraphnumdepth,\subparagraphnumdepth,
+% \parttocdepth,\chaptertocdepth
+% \sectiontocdepth,\subsectiontocdepth,\subsubsectiontocdepth,
+% \paragraphtocdepth,\subparagraphtocdepth}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/16}{added}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{indirect definition by
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}
+% The section numbering levels, to be compared with counter
+% \cnt{secnumdepth}, and the table of contents entry levels, to be compared
+% with counter \cs{tocdepth}, of all outline commands defined by the
+% \KOMAScript{} classes.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] These are specified to be \emph{read only}. They are defined by
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}.
+% \end{description}
+% \end{command}^^A \partnumdepth … \subparagraphtocdepth
+%
+% \begin{command}{\part}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/25}{indirect definition by \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/06/27}{definition moved behind \cs{section} because of
+% bookmark level workaround}
+% \begin{command}{\chapter}
+% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{using \cs{chapterpagestyle}}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{indirect definition by \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}
+% \begin{command}{\section}
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/22}{\cs{sectfont} before \cs{size@section}}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/28}{\cs{nobreak} after \cs{sectfont} added}
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/30}{initial value of \cs{parfillskip} depending on
+% option \opt{version}}
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{not needed \cs{nobreak} removed}
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{using \cs{scr@startsection}}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{indirect definition by \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}
+% \begin{command}{\subsection}
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/22}{\cs{sectfont} before \cs{size@subsection}}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/28}{\cs{nobreak} after \cs{sectfont} added}
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/30}{initial value of \cs{parfillskip} depending on
+% option \opt{version}}
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{not needed \cs{nobreak} removed}
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{using \cs{scr@startsection}}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{indirect definition by \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}
+% \begin{command}{\subsubsection}
+% \changes{v2.3d}{1995/08/19}{with \cls*{scrartcl} also numbered and added to
+% ToC}
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/22}{\cs{sectfont} added before
+% \cs{size@subsubsection}}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/28}{\cs{nobreak} added after \cs{sectfont}}
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/30}{initial value of \cs{parfillskip} depending on
+% option \opt{version}}
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{not needed \cs{nobreak} removed}
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{using \cs{scr@startsection}}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{indirect definition by \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}
+% \begin{command}{\paragraph}
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/22}{\cs{sectfont} added before
+% \cs{size@paragraph}}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/28}{\cs{nobreak} added after \cs{sectfont}}
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{not needed \cs{nobreak} removed}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{indirect definition by \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}
+% \begin{command}{\subparagraph}
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/22}{\cs{sectfont} added before
+% \cs{size@subparagraph}}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/28}{\cs{nobreak} added after \cs{sectfont}}
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{not needed \cs{nobreak} removed}
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{using \cs{scr@startsection}}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{indirect definition by \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{\cs{parindent} replaced by \cs{scr@parindent}}
+% Commands \cs{part}, \cs{chapter}, \cs{section}, \cs{subsection},
+% \cs{subsubection}, \cs{paragraph} and \cs{subparagraph} are defined using
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}. The definition of \cs{part} must be \emph{after}
+% \cs{section} because of the bookmark level workaround (see definition of
+% \cs{DelcareSectionCommand}. The declaration of \cs{chapter} uses only those
+% settings that do not depend on options, because settings by class options
+% must no be overwritten here. So all settings that do depend on class options
+% have to be initialized before the options (see the \texttt{prepare} code of
+% such options above). For the lower levels this is only the case for the font.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*book|report>
+\DeclareSectionCommand[%
+ style=chapter,%
+ level=\z@,%
+ pagestyle=plain,%
+ tocstyle=chapter,%
+ tocindent=\z@,%
+ tocnumwidth=1.5em%
+]{chapter}
+%</book|report>
+\DeclareSectionCommand[%
+ style=section,%
+ level=1,%
+ indent=\z@,%
+ beforeskip=-3.5ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex,%
+ afterskip=2.3ex \@plus.2ex,%
+ tocstyle=section,%
+%<book|report> tocindentfollows=chapter,%
+%<article> tocindent=0pt,%
+%<book|report> tocindent=1.5em,%
+%<article> tocnumwidth=1.5em%
+%<book|report> tocnumwidth=2.3em%
+]{section}
+\DeclareSectionCommand[%
+ style=part,%
+%<article> level=\z@,%
+%<report|book> level=\m@ne,%
+%<report|book> pagestyle=plain,%
+ tocstyle=part,%
+ toclevel=\m@ne,%
+ tocindent=\z@,%
+ tocnumwidth=2em%
+]{part}
+\DeclareSectionCommand[%
+ style=section,%
+ level=2,%
+ indent=\z@,%
+ beforeskip=-3.25ex\@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex,%
+ afterskip=1.5ex \@plus .2ex,%
+%<article> tocstyle=subsection,%
+%<book|report> tocstyle=section,%
+%<article> tocindent=1.5em,%
+%<book|report> tocindent=3.8em,%
+%<article> tocnumwidth=2.3em%
+%<book|report> tocnumwidth=3.2em%
+]{subsection}
+\DeclareSectionCommand[%
+ style=section,%
+ level=3,%
+ indent=\z@,%
+ beforeskip=-3.25ex\@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex,%
+ afterskip=1.5ex \@plus .2ex,%
+%<article> tocstyle=subsection,%
+%<book|report> tocstyle=section,%
+%<article> tocindent=3.8em,%
+%<book|report> tocindent=7.0em,%
+%<article> tocnumwidth=3.2em%
+%<book|report> tocnumwidth=4.1em%
+]{subsubsection}
+\DeclareSectionCommand[%
+ style=section,%
+ level=4,%
+ indent=\z@,%
+ beforeskip=3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus.2ex,%
+ afterskip=-1em,%
+%<article> tocstyle=subsection,%
+ tocindentfollows=subsubsection,%
+%<book|report> tocstyle=section,%
+%<article> tocindent=7.0em,%
+%<book|report> tocindent=10em,%
+%<article> tocnumwidth=4.1em%
+%<book|report> tocnumwidth=5em%
+]{paragraph}
+\DeclareSectionCommand[%
+ style=section,%
+ level=5,%
+ indent=\scr@parindent,%
+ beforeskip=3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex,%
+ afterskip=-1em,%
+%<article> tocstyle=subsection,%
+%<book|report> tocstyle=section,%
+%<article> tocindent=10em,%
+%<book|report> tocindent=12em,%
+%<article> tocnumwidth=5em%
+%<book|report> tocnumwidth=6em%
+]{subparagraph}
+\expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@lt{3.15}\relax
+ \let\scr@subparagraph@sectionindent\parindent
+\else
+ \def\scr@subparagraph@sectionindent{\scr@parindent}%
+\fi
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{command}^^A \subparagraph
+% \end{command}^^A \paragraph
+% \end{command}^^A \subsubsection
+% \end{command}^^A \subsection
+% \end{command}^^A \section
+% \end{command}^^A \chapter
+% \end{command}^^A \part
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Fonts}
+%
+% The font settings of dedicated elements of the the corresponding section
+% levels already have been done. But there are also some elements that do not
+% correspond with a single section level.
+%
+% \begin{fontelement}{disposition}
+% \changes{v2.95b}{2006/07/30}{added}
+% \begin{fontelement}{sectioning}
+% \changes{v2.95b}{2006/07/30}{added}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectfont}
+% \changes{v2.8c}{2001/06/29}{\cs{normalcolor} added}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/11}{earlier definition to support option
+% \opt{headings\quotechar=standardclasses}}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/29}{\cs{sffamily} replaced by \cs{@gr@gsffamily}}
+% This element is not only used by all section levels before the dedicated
+% element of the single level is used. It is also used by other elements like
+% the \fnt{chaptertocentry}. The command \cs{sectfont} instead of the
+% \cs{newkomafont} default is used for compatibility only. So it is specified
+% as internal. Using it as user command is deprecated!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</class&!letter>
+%<*(class&!letter)|(package&extend)>
+%<*prepare>
+\newcommand*{\sectfont}{\normalcolor\@gr@gsffamily\bfseries}
+%</prepare>
+%</(class&!letter)|(package&extend)>
+%<*class&!letter>
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@disposition}{\sectfont}
+\aliaskomafont{sectioning}{disposition}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}^^A \sectfont
+% \end{fontelement}^^A sectioning
+% \end{fontelement}^^A disposition
+%
+%
+% \begin{option}{headings}
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1996/01/20}{Size of \cs{chapter} decreased by one grade
+% step}
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1996/01/20}{using \cs{chapterheadstartvskip} and
+% \cs{chapterheadendvskip}}
+% \changes{v2.7c}{2000/01/19}{vertical distance after chapters slightly
+% changed and glue added}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/10}{added}
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{extended optional argument}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{using \cs{FamilyKeyState}}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/08/26}{\cs{KOMA@options} replaced by \cs{KOMAoptions}}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/11}{value \opt{\quotechar=standardclasses} added}
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{using \cs{scr@chapter@beforeskip} and
+% \cs{scr@chapter@afterskip}}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{using internal value storage}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{values of \cs{scr@chapter@beforeskip} negative}
+% Option \opt{headings} is the main switch for the headings of all outlines.
+% It provides the following values:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*option>
+\KOMA@key{headings}{%
+ \KOMA@set@ncmdkey{headings}{@tempa}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{=big}:] use big sized headings. This also changes the distances
+% of chapter and redefined \cs{chapterheadstartvskip} and
+% \cs{chapterheadendvskip} (\cls*{scrbook} and \cls*{scrreprt} only).
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {big}{0},%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{=normal}:] use medium sized headings. This also changes the
+% distances of chapter and redefined \cs{chapterheadstartvskip} and
+% \cs{chapterheadendvskip} (\cls*{scrbook} and \cls*{scrreprt} only).
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {normal}{1},%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{=small}:] use small sized headings. This also changes the
+% distances of chapter and redefined \cs{chapterheadstartvskip} and
+% \cs{chapterheadendvskip} (\cls*{scrbook} and \cls*{scrreprt} only).
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {small}{2},%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{=openany}:] same as \opt{open=any} for \cls*{scrbook} and
+% \cls*{scrreprt}.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*book|report>
+ {openany}{3},%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{=openright}:] same as \opt{open=right} for \cls*{scrbook} and
+% \cls*{scrreprt}.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {openright}{4},%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{=openleft}:] same as \opt{open=left} for \cls*{scrbook} and
+% \cls*{scrreprt}.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {openleft}{5},%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{=twolinechapter}:] use chapter headings with two lines. The first
+% line is a kind of prefix line with the number and a prefix text only. The
+% second one is the heading text.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {twolinechapter}{6},{chapterprefix}{6},{chapterwithprefix}{6},%
+ {chapterwithprefixline}{6},%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{=onelinechapter}:] use chapter headings without the prefix line.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {onelinechapter}{7},{nochapterprefix}{7},{chapterwithoutprefix}{7},%
+ {chapterwithoutprefixline}{7},%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{=twolineappendix}:] use chapter headings with two lines in the
+% appendix. This overwrites \opt{headings=onelinechapter} for the chapters
+% of the appendix.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {twolineappendix}{8},{appendixprefix}{8},{appendixwithprefix}{8},%
+ {appendixwithprefixline}{8},%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{=onelineappendix}:] use chapter headings without prefix line in
+% the appendix. This overwrites \opt{headings=twolinechapter} for the
+% chapters of the appendix.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {onelineappendix}{9},{noappendixprefix}{9},{appendixwithoutprefix}{9},%
+ {appendixwithoutprefixline}{9},%
+%</book|report>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{=optiontotocandhead}:] activates the extended option handling of
+% all outline commands and uses an unspecified optional argument as default
+% of for the running head and the ToC entry.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {optiontotocandhead}{10},{optiontoheadandtoc}{10},%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{=optiontotoc}:] activates the extended option handling of all
+% outline commands and uses an unspecified optional argument as default for
+% the ToC entry only.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {optiontotoc}{11},%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{=optiontohead}:] activated the extended option handling of all
+% outline commands and uses an unspecified optional argument as default fot
+% the running head.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {optiontohead}{12},%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\opt{=standardclasses}:] reconfigure headings (at least the fonts) to
+% look more like the headings of the standard classes than the defaults of
+% \KOMAScript.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {standardclasses}{13}%
+ }{#1}%
+ \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ \ifcase \@tempa\relax% big
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{big}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{normal}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{small}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{standardclasses}%
+ \KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{big}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First of all we handle the three size values.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Note:] These are redefining \cs{chapterheadstartvkip} and
+% \cs{chapterheadendvskip}.
+% \item[Note:] The |+\baselineskip+\parskip| is needed to stay compatible with
+% old version of \KOMAScript{} not providing \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}. They
+% are regarded inside setting of the preamble to print heading with
+% |beforeskip=0pt| at the very beginning of the text area.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*book|report>
+ \renewcommand*{\scr@chapter@beforeskip}{-3.3\baselineskip-\parskip}%
+ \renewcommand*{\scr@chapter@afterskip}{%
+ 1.725\baselineskip \@plus .115\baselineskip \@minus .192\baselineskip
+ }%
+ \renewcommand*{\scr@chapter@innerskip}{.5\baselineskip}%
+ \renewcommand*{\chapterheadstartvskip}{\vspace{\@tempskipa}}%
+ \renewcommand*{\chapterheadendvskip}{%
+ \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@lt{3.15}\vspace\@tempskipa
+ \else\vskip\@tempskipa\fi
+ }%
+ \renewcommand*{\chapterheadmidvskip}{\par\nobreak\vskip\@tempskipa}%
+%</book|report>
+ \setkomafont{part}{\Huge}%
+ \setkomafont{partnumber}{\huge}%
+%<book|report> \setkomafont{chapter}{\huge}%
+%<book|report> \setkomafont{chapterprefix}{\size@chapter}%
+ \setkomafont{section}{\Large}%
+ \setkomafont{subsection}{\large}%
+ \setkomafont{subsubsection}{\normalsize}%
+ \setkomafont{paragraph}{\normalsize}%
+ \setkomafont{subparagraph}{\normalsize}%
+ \or % normal
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{big}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{normal}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{small}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{standardclasses}%
+ \KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{normal}%
+%<*book|report>
+ \renewcommand*{\scr@chapter@beforeskip}{-3\baselineskip-\parskip}%
+ \renewcommand*{\scr@chapter@afterskip}{%
+ 1.5\baselineskip \@plus .1\baselineskip \@minus .167\baselineskip
+ }%
+ \renewcommand*{\scr@chapter@innerskip}{.5\baselineskip}%
+ \renewcommand*{\chapterheadstartvskip}{\vspace{\@tempskipa}}%
+ \renewcommand*{\chapterheadendvskip}{%
+ \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@lt{3.15}\vspace\@tempskipa
+ \else\vskip\@tempskipa\fi
+ }%
+ \renewcommand*{\chapterheadmidvskip}{\par\nobreak\vskip\@tempskipa}%
+%</book|report>
+ \setkomafont{part}{\huge}%
+ \setkomafont{partnumber}{\huge}%
+%<*book|report>
+ \setkomafont{chapter}{\LARGE}%
+ \setkomafont{chapterprefix}{\size@chapter}%
+ \setkomafont{section}{\Large}%
+ \setkomafont{subsection}{\large}%
+%</book|report>
+%<*article>
+ \setkomafont{section}{\large}%
+ \setkomafont{subsection}{\normalsize}%
+%</article>
+ \setkomafont{subsubsection}{\normalsize}%
+ \setkomafont{paragraph}{\normalsize}%
+ \setkomafont{subparagraph}{\normalsize}%
+ \or % small
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{big}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{normal}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{small}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{standardclasses}%
+ \KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{small}%
+%<*book|report>
+ \renewcommand*{\scr@chapter@beforeskip}{-2.8\baselineskip-\parskip}%
+ \renewcommand*{\scr@chapter@afterskip}{%
+ 1.35\baselineskip \@plus 0.09\baselineskip \@minus .15\baselineskip
+ }%
+ \renewcommand*{\scr@chapter@innerskip}{.5\baselineskip}%
+ \renewcommand*{\chapterheadstartvskip}{\vspace{\@tempskipa}}%
+ \renewcommand*{\chapterheadendvskip}{%
+ \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@lt{3.15}\vspace\@tempskipa
+ \else\vskip\@tempskipa\fi
+ }%
+ \renewcommand*{\chapterheadmidvskip}{\par\nobreak\vskip\@tempskipa}%
+%</book|report>
+ \setkomafont{part}{\LARGE}%
+ \setkomafont{partnumber}{\LARGE}%
+%<*book|report>
+ \setkomafont{chapter}{\Large}%
+ \setkomafont{chapterprefix}{\size@chapter}%
+ \setkomafont{section}{\large}%
+%</book|report>
+%<*article>
+ \setkomafont{section}{\normalsize}%
+%</article>
+ \setkomafont{subsection}{\normalsize}%
+ \setkomafont{subsubsection}{\normalsize}%
+ \setkomafont{paragraph}{\normalsize}%
+ \setkomafont{subparagraph}{\normalsize}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cls*{scrbook} and \cls*{scrreprt} also provide settings that are delegated
+% to option \opt{open}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \or % openany
+%<*book|report>
+ \KOMAoptions{open=any}%
+%</book|report>
+ \or % openright
+%<*book|report>
+ \KOMAoptions{open=right}%
+%</book|report>
+ \or % openleft
+%<*book|report>
+ \KOMAoptions{open=left}%
+%</book|report>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cls*{scrbook} and \cls*{scrreprt} also provide settings that are delegated
+% to option \opt{chapterprefix} and \opt{appendixprefix}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \or % twolinechapter
+%<*book|report>
+ \KOMAoptions{chapterprefix=true}%
+%</book|report>
+ \or % onelinechapter
+%<*book|report>
+ \KOMAoptions{chapterprefix=false}%
+%</book|report>
+ \or % twolineappendix
+%<*book|report>
+ \KOMAoptions{appendixprefix=true}%
+%</book|report>
+ \or % onelineappendix
+%<*book|report>
+ \KOMAoptions{appendixprefix=false}%
+%</book|report>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We have also options to handle the extended optional argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \or % optiontotocandhead
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{optiontotocandhead}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{optiontotoc}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{optiontohead}%
+ \KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{optiontotocandhead}%
+ \scr@activate@xsection{3}%
+ \or % optiontotoc
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{optiontotocandhead}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{optiontotoc}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{optiontohead}%
+ \KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{optiontotoc}%
+ \scr@activate@xsection{2}%
+ \or % optiontohead
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{optiontotocandhead}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{optiontotoc}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{optiontohead}%
+ \KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{optiontohead}%
+ \scr@activate@xsection{1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Last but not least the option to activate the standard class emulation of
+% headings.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \or % standardclasses
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{big}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{normal}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{small}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{standardclasses}%
+ \KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{standardclasses}%
+%<*book|report>
+ \renewcommand*{\scr@chapter@beforeskip}{-50\p@}%
+ \renewcommand*{\scr@chapter@afterskip}{40\p@}%
+ \renewcommand*{\scr@chapter@innerskip}{20\p@}%
+ \renewcommand*{\chapterheadstartvskip}{\vspace{\@tempskipa}}%
+ \renewcommand*{\chapterheadendvskip}{\vskip\@tempskipa}%
+ \renewcommand*{\chapterheadmidvskip}{\par\nobreak\vskip\@tempskipa}%
+ \setkomafont{part}{\Huge}%
+ \setkomafont{partnumber}{\huge}%
+ \setkomafont{chapter}{\Huge}%
+ \setkomafont{chapterprefix}{\huge}%
+%</book|report>
+%<*article>
+ \setkomafont{part}{\huge}%
+ \setkomafont{partnumber}{\Large}%
+%</article>
+ \setkomafont{section}{\Large}%
+ \setkomafont{subsection}{\large}%
+ \setkomafont{subsubsection}{\normalsize}%
+ \setkomafont{paragraph}{\normalsize}%
+ \setkomafont{subparagraph}{\normalsize}%
+ \renewcommand*{\sectfont}{\bfseries}%
+%<book|report> \KOMAoptions{open=right,chapterprefix=true}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+\KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{big}
+%<book|report>\KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{onelinechapter}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{option}^^A headings
+%
+% \begin{option}{bigheadings,normalheadings,smallheadings}
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1996/01/20}{added}
+% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{option name fixed}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/10}{obsolete}
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bigheadings,\@normalheadings,\@smallheadings}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/10}{removed}
+% \end{macro}^^A \@bigheadings … \@smallheadings
+% We also have some deprecated options.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{bigheadings}{headings=big}
+\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{normalheadings}{headings=normal}
+\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{smallheadings}{headings=small}
+%</option>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{option}^^A smallheading,normalheadings,bigheadings
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</class&!letter>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+% \PrintChanges
+%
+\endinput
+% Local Variables:
+% mode: doctex
+% ispell-local-dictionary: "en_US"
+% eval: (flyspell-mode 1)
+% TeX-master: t
+% TeX-engine: luatex-dev
+% eval: (setcar (or (cl-member "Index" (setq-local TeX-command-list (copy-alist TeX-command-list)) :key #'car :test #'string-equal) (setq-local TeX-command-list (cons nil TeX-command-list))) '("Index" "mkindex %s" TeX-run-index nil t :help "makeindex for dtx"))
+% End:
generated by cgit v1.2.3 (git 2.39.1) at 2024-11-18 01:31:30 +0000